Home

StarQuality User Manual

1. 7 000 000 5000000 d 5 3 Polynomial x 2 3000 000 Z i trendline 1000000 D 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 2010 05 16 12 2010 06 01 00 lt Wu throushout BI oL total DL Total Trend H DL MMO Aer E pLMMO B 10 117 4 5185 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughout Export to XLS show details 7 000 000 000 5000 000 000 S 3 000 000 000 5 2 A Jm Polynomial x6 01 10 05 11 10 05 21 1 10 06 01 I 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 11 08 2010 05 21 16 2010 05 01 00 trendline lt Wu throughput EI oL Total DL Total Trend fl DL mmo ABF E DLMMO B 10 117 4 51B5 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughout Export to XL show details 7 000 000 5 000 000 3000000 8 amp 1000000 i mmm Difference 3000 000 x o amp 5000000 trendline 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 2010 05 16 12 2010 05 24 06 2010 06 01 00 lt Wu throughput EI or total DL Total Trend BH DL MMO ABF EE 10 117 4 5185 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughout Export to XL show details Average and one Deviation trendlines 2010 06 01 00 2010 05 24 06 2010 05 16 12 7 000 000 E 500000 5 8 S 3 000 000 5 2 1000000 D 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 lt Wu throushout BI oL total a DL MIMO B DL Total Trend a DL MIMO ABF Figure 5 16 Examples of Trendline Settings StarQuality User Manual Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds In this chapter Overview on page
2. Name OR2 Description xe Connection v User system Password SYSTEM password Right syspea zl Keep collected 365 data for days Timeout sec Retries nica EEE 15 min Si Choose an icon Jicon_equip png sl Server group no server group definied sl Collect data Vv Additional measurements I add new Measurement type Name Other All types XI Index parameters Switched Max IV Active session 0 Active session NEN P P Ee IV Active session 0 SYS Active session eg D wm Figure 4 11 Activating Data Collection Oracle 10 Change Server Group to Oracle and choose specific measurements or all measurements by selecting the corresponding check boxes 11 Scroll down and click OK to implement changes The Server field turns green which indicates that collection is active StarQuality User Manual Se E E Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Name OR2 Connection xe User system Password SYSTEM password Right SYSDBA Server group Oracle server een Previous server None Collect data Yes Keep collected 365 data for days 15 min Created by admin Created when 2009 03 01 11 44 47 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 03 01 14 07 06 Figure 4 12 Data Collection Active Oracle i To add equipment under the UNIX Linux site I Make sure the following prerequisi
3. srrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 146 Figure 4 11 Activating Data Collection Oracle J rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 147 Figure 4 12 Data Collection Active Oracle J wrunnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnrnnvrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnvnnnnnnerennnnnnnnne 148 Figure 4 13 Default Unix Linux Template e veeergeeeeeeEEEeSEKENNNEEEeEeENEECEdeeEENEEEOEEEEKE NENNEN Neen 149 Figure 4 14 Network Discovery Results Unix Linux EEN 150 Figure 4 15 Activating Data Collection UNIX rrrvvnronnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnvnnnnnnnnnennnrnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 151 Figure 4 16 Data Collection Active UNIX secsssseusccccesssncteussdavnevasvecewassauenpnetetauessbucencebencsuebandeieeten 152 Figure 5 1 The Measurements Main Menu Item with the Browser and the Icon View 154 Figure 5 2 Hierarchy of EE EE 155 Figure 5 3 Navigation between Measurements Detailed View EE 158 Figure 5 4 Split MEIER a EE eEEe dE ee 159 Estelle Eege Eege 160 Figure 5 6 Measurements Operation drop down Menu RENE 161 Figure 5 7 SHOW SEENEN 161 Fig re 5 8 SROw ie 162 Figure 5 9 Logical BS History WiINdOW use deed eege EES dE ee 162 Figure 5 10 Measurements Small ChartS ss ssssssssssusrnerrnrsunrnnnnnrrunnnnnunnnennnnnunnnenunnnunnnennnnen nnne 164 Figure 5 11 Chart Settings in Measurements annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 165 Figure 5 12 Display with Flash
4. INFORMATION The Select All check box refers only to the currently displayed page For selecting all the results in all pages select the check box separately on each page I 9 Click Type Selection in the selection path Figure 8 20 the Exported Entity choice window is displayed For AU BS data select Logical BS measurements default For common BTS data select Common measurements gt Browser Bulk export wizard 4 Basic parameters gt BTS selection gt Type selection gt Export Logical BS measurements Measurement types Common measurements Figure 8 22 Exported Entity Selection 10 Click Export in the selection path Figure 8 20 The following message is displayed Windows Internet Explorer x After clicking on the OK button the application will start to generate the Excel file This might take several minutes please do not navigate away and do not close your browser Figure 8 23 Export Message 11 Click OK In certain cases a second message is displayed informing that the data may exceed 66 000 lines Click OK A standard File Save Download window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Ge O amp 226 Chapter 8 Reports Using the Bulk Export Wizard File Download Security Warning Do you want to open or save this file Es Name y 4Motion Center 1 2009 06 21 15 53 52 xls Type EECH From 10 10 187 113 Open Save K PS While files
5. StarQuality Setup ME Completing the StarQuality Setup Wizard StarQuality has been installed on your computer Click Finish to close this wizard Cancel Figure 2 22 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation Back 18 Click Finish to close the wizard 19 Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation StarQuality User Manual G D 28 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 20 Load a licence and run StarQuality Refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 105 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 105 StarQuality User Manual Ss Se 8 29 2 3 23 1 2 3 1 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on Installation on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 3 1 below This installation type involves the installation of the following components M Oracle server Oracle client is not required E cygwin BW StarQuality The required steps are 1 Configure network ports Section 2 3 1 1 2 Install Oracle server Section 2 3 1 2 In
6. BSR F MAC F Iv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 10 E7 62 1E 96 Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 10 E7 62 39 5D IV 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF 98 6F 2F Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF C3 DA 6A Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF C3 DAFD Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF C3 FB 3C Figure 8 26 SU Selection INFORMATION For Steps 8 through 10 the Select All check box refers only to the currently displayed page For y selecting all the results in all pages select the check box separately on each page 11 Click Export in the selection path The following message is displayed Windows Internet Explorer x A After clicking on the OK button the application will start to generate the Excel file This might take several minutes please do not navigate away and do not close your browser Figure 8 27 Export Message 12 Click OK In certain cases a second message is displayed informing that the data may exceed 66 000 lines Click OK A standard File Save Download window is displayed The default file naming format is StarQuality lt Report Name gt lt Date gt lt Time gt Report name is defined in Step 2 8 6 2 Bulk Export External API This SQL based interface is a priced option and requires a specialized licence It enables M Unlimited amount of data not limited
7. Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Running StarQuality on Windows StarQuality EE A li Warning 76 Mnorio Normak 224 G WR mmm mm mmm mmm VERSION 3 2 2 Level Every one 3 Type Everyone Group alarms Every one 3 Acknowledged R OK Figure 2 69 Main Window 4 From Settings select Servers gt Licenses The Licences Configuration window is displayed The entries marked red indicate missing or invalid licences that should be replaced 5 If necessary load a new license file using the WEB GUI see To load a licence on page 105 6 Do one of the following M Inthe computer service management window myComputer gt Manage gt Services start the services CYGWIN sshd and StarQuality service M Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click start all Wait for the list to refresh M Return to the cygwin shell and enter the command opt starquality bin start stop pvsr start 7 In the WEB GUI from Settings select Server gt Start Stop Status click check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are green StarQuality User Manual GE O 107 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Running StarQuality on Solaris Server start stop status 16 items found check all Name Status Type Server group Host Login Directory Parami Param2 Figure 2 70 Server Status Wind
8. Seconds are ignored minutes are regarded as the closest quarter of an hour 4 Select NE Type SU and any technology required 5 Click BTS Selection in the path at the top of the work area see Figure 8 20 the filtering criteria screen is displayed see Figure 8 21 6 Enter the following criteria All categories are optional which means if left empty no filtering is performed Also all input is according to the search rules described in Searching Measurements on page 167 Site name BTS name BTS Address IP Site ID as exists in the database 7 Click OK a list of network elements matching the filter criteria is displayed see Figure 8 21 You can repeat the filtering until getting the desired results 8 Select the check boxes of BTSs you wish to export data from or use the topmost check box to select all the BTSs 9 Click Sector Selection in the selection path see Figure 8 20 A list of all the sectors belonging to the BTSs chosen in Step 8 is displayed 10 Click SU Selection in the selection path A list of all the SUs belonging to the sectors chosen in Step 9 is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp D 223 Chapter 8 Reports Bulk Export External API Bulk export wizard a i L Basic parameters gt BTS selection gt Sector selection gt SU selection gt Export GOLN OG M Site name V BTS name 2 v BTS address V Site ID
9. StarQuality User Manual Ee Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic KPIs Continued Key Performance Indicators KPIs KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Frames Transmitted frames per second Frames Submitted High Frames Submitted Low Frames Submitted Mid Frames Submitted Total HVFSH HVFSL HVFSM HVFST The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium The count does not include control and wireless management frames or retransmissions There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed High Mid and Low Wireless Frames Received frames per second Wireless Frames Received VWER The total number of frames received from the wireless medium The count includes data frames as well as control and wireless management frames The count does not include bad frames and duplicate frames Wireless Frames Transmitted frames per second Wireless Frames Submitted Beacons Wireless Frames Submitted OtherMng and Data Wireless Frames Submitted Total HVWFB HVWFO HVWFT The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames including contr
10. 6 Verify that the entry in the license list is not colored red 9 5 3 Device and Measurement Summary You can display a list of all basic equipments and for each measurement type the number of objects in the system gt To use the summary list From Settings select Servers gt Device and Measurement Summary A table of all devices is displayed indicating the site and equipment name IP address F H C A and total number of measurements StarQuality User Manual Sei E 258 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Server Configuration gt Browser Servers BS 01 Licences TE aad aA Summary table for all equipments Seele Site name Equipment name IP address FHCA Sum 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration bes DO E P 05 Start Stop Status view FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 43 943 06 Server events view FDD SNMP 10 0 16 21 15 15 07 Collector load Gen 750 MERY 3 view TDD 10 0 22 252 av a view SERVER HEALTH 172 30 105 216 135 135 view SERVER HEALTH 216 43 view 16a i SERVER HEALTH 216 H view SERVER HEALTH A 172 30 105 210 172 30 105 210 16162 37 37 view SERVER HEALTH ac 172 30 105 210 16162 37 37 view SERVER HEALTH Free text o view SERVER HEALTH OR2 101 101 view SERVER HEALTH ES o view SERVER HEALTH Orade 176 175 z FDD TFTP 10 0 16 10 SU 00 00 00 00 00 view on eer FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 SU 00 10 7 22 0F ges dich SUs 1E ramse
11. CO Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install Interpreters 43 Install Libs 43 Install Math 43 Install Net 4 Install EI Perl 4 Install 47 5 8 8 4 nja 9 972k perl Python 4 Install Perl Version s JV Hide obsolete packages Ss Figure 2 51 Select Packages Window Perl Version 12 Click Next The installation procees starts 47 Cygwin Setup Progress This page displays the progress of the download or installation Lg Installing libdb4 5 4 5 20 2 2 Husr bin cygbz2 1 dll Progress gg Total EEE Disk md Figure 2 52 Cygwin Installation Process 13 Click Finish StarQuality User Manual 8 De 55 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Installation Status and Create Icons Of x Create Icons Tell setup if you want it to create a few icons for convenient access to the Cygwin environment IV Create icon on Desktop JV Add icon to Start Menu Installation Status Installation Complete Figure 2 53 Cygwin Installation Completion 2 4 1 4 Installing StarQuality 2 4 1 5 Overview This Installation type is applicable when installing StarQuality on Windows server with Oracle database on a separate machine refer to Table 2 1 The installation must be performed by a local administrator user During the installation the installer writes information into two destinations the Details view and the log
12. Figure 8 2 Adding a New Report Variable 2 Enter a unique and meaningful name for the variable The name should reflect the device type as well as the measurement For example TDD Utilization 3 Select a Measurement Name from the drop down list The list is based on measurements per collector equipment type Make sure to select the measurement from the correct collector 4 Leave Detailed summary at equipment level unchecked UT Verify that the Active check box is selected Leave the interval of 15min N In the When field select the required timeframe for collection from the drop down menu or leave the value as non stop 8 Click OK The report variable is added to the list gt To edit an existing report variable I Click edit next to the variable to be changed The Report Variable Configuration window is displayed see Figure 8 2 StarQuality User Manual AS 8 oa 207 Chapter 8 Reports Defining Report Views 2 Edit the variable name as required 3 Select if to activate the variable calculation using the Active check box 4 Click OK the report variable is updated in the list INFORMATION MM An active report variable consumes computer resources Therefore it is recommended to define only ses the required variables and deactivate redundant ones ES E The only way to disable a variable is to set it as inactive You cannot delete a report variable 8 2 2 Defining Report Views Rep
13. I Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 Follow the next sections for installation details Basic Checks The installer checks the following details RB Version of the operating system M Required packages RB Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation StarQuality User Manual Se amp E s0 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality e Telnet 10 10 187 126 hash 3 66H StarQuality vu2 en bin INFO Command line parameters Installer started LOG file tmp starquality install log Checking perl ve i Found perl usr Checking OS type OS Solaris_x86 Checking perl 32 64bit Checking perl PerllO Perl was built with PerllO Checking perl threading Perl threading disabled Checking required packages Package SUNWapchr found Package SUNWapchu found Package SUNWbash found Package SUNWggrp found Package SUNWgtar found Package SUNWgzip found Package SUNWlexpt found Package SUNWsshcu found Package Package hdu found Package hr found Package hu found Done Checking required packages for the schematic map feature Package SUNWpng found Packag
14. SU Subscriber Unit XLS Excel file format StarQuality User Manual 8 amp Gr
15. StarQuality User Manual Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Downloading Data to Excel Files 7 3 Downloading Data to Excel Files You can download the displayed data in XLS format The generated XLS file containing the measurement data also includes the name of the threshold and the background color of the data cells that violate the threshold matches the color code of its severity level If threshold violation occurred but that value was not taken into account in the current alarm then the background color of the cell is set to cyan If a public or private as opposed to normal chart is exported to an XLS file the generated file differs in the following aspects The number of columns and their names are the same as in the chart definition Regardless of the chart definition the values are not aggregated The resolution of rows follows the smallest time interval of the measurement data thus infrequent measurement data are stored sparsely in the table _ To save data to Excel M To save the alarms table click view xls open or save the file Figure 7 9 Sample XLS of Alarm Table M To save the chart data click Export to XLS above the chart The first few lines of a sample exported XLS file are StarQuality User Manual amp 202 Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Downloading Data to Excel Files 12 2009 03 04 12 30 00 13 2009 03 04 12 45 00 Figure 7
16. alvarion StarQuality User Manual Software Version 3 5 January 2012 P N 215989 Document History Document History Changed Item Description Date This is the first release Version 1 0 December 2008 General Version 1 5 Changed to reflect multiple server group sites Added the following chapters M Network Discovery E Setting Alarm Thresholds HM Reports Introduction Moved Counters for BreezeMAX from Introduction to Chapter 4 Viewing Measurements February 2009 Installation Added licence loading steps Settings Moved topics into relevant chapters General Added Solaris information Ver 2 0 June 2009 Added 4Motion to the supported equipment Introduction Data Structure Hierarchy changed Installation Added installation on Solaris Added upgrade for Windows installation Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy Hierarchy changed Activating SOAP server new Viewing Measurements Added 4Motion set of discovery measurements screen captures changed Setting Alarm Thresholds Added 4Motion information NBI New Chapter Reports Chapter modified Installation Added Linux as an optional OS Measurements Changed measurement definitions Added search feature for text including spaces Added Operations drop down menu options General Added BreezeACCESS VL support information Ver 2 5 December 200
17. Output folder C starqualityopt starquality lib No value is set For Oracle TNS Completed a fullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 36 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete 7 Click Next The Oracle Database Configuration window is displayed 8 Choose one of the following options for database creation Install Oracle Database 10g If you choose this option browse to the directory from which to install the database and the destination directory in which the database will be installed StarQuality User Manual Se amp se QD Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Bisi E StarQuality installation Oracle Database configuration Install Oracle Database 10g Please select Oracle installer folder Oracle 10 2 0 3 32bit setup for Vista and 10 2 0 5 patch required Installer folder 10203 vista w2k8 x86 production db dbiDiski setup exe p8202632 10205 WINNT disklisetup exe C installations db Browse Oracle database install directory c Oracle Browse Set Oracle database home directory Cijoraclexejappl oraclefproduct 10 2 O0 server Browse Nullsoft Instal stem 2 42 Figure 2 37 Oracle Database Configuration 10g Option Set Oracle Database Home Directory If you choose this option browse to the directory from which to set the External Oracle database as the Oracle source M StarQuality Setup OP StarQuality in
18. Search EEN 214 Figure 8 10 On demand Reports Measurement TypesS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnn 215 Figure 8 11 On demand Reports Measurement Types SettingsS rrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 215 Figure 8 12 On demand Reports Object Parameters NNN 216 Figure 8 13 On demand Reports Saving OPtiONS ENEE ENEE 216 StarQuality User Manual SE Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 8 19 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Figure 8 23 Figure 8 24 Figure 8 25 Figure 8 26 Figure 8 27 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 9 12 Figure 9 13 Figure 9 14 Figure 9 15 Figure 9 16 Figure 9 17 StarQuality User Manual Figures On demand Reports ue 216 Report EXPO Eesnime eiiam raa aiei da 217 Report IMPDO ET 218 Scheduled Report Configuration sx ESNEENESERRSNESEERKNEERERENEEEREEEEESENERESENEEEEEREKEESEEENEEN 219 Reports NEIEN EE 221 Calendar views day week month and year for selecting the time interval 223 Bulk Export Wizard MAdom vassmsssesoseserpm gta dnne 224 Bulk Export Wizard Filtering Devices rrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnunenenne 225 Exported Entity Selection Less enken 226 gt 8 EE EE 226 ERR ea 5 E 227 Sample XIS FE eek akan 227 TR E 229 EXport MESSage neiii a
19. on page 105 INFORMATION Depending on what license is present before the upgrade the new license might deactivate the collection on certain collectors Click Reactivate eqs in the Licence Configuration Window to start the collection on all devices see Figure 2 71 A message will appear showing how many devices were activated I M Start the servers see To start the server following initial installation on page 105 2 11 2 StarQuality Upgrade on Solaris The upgrade has to be performed by an administrator user Upgrade is available between immediate adjacent versions only StarQuality User Manual Se D Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Configuration Parameters Stop the StarQuality service and processes prior to upgrade This also stops the Oracle database so you must start the database back manually prior to upgrade _ To upgrade StarQuality Solaris I Perform Stop Services as follows a While logged in as root user enter the command usr apache bin apachectl stop The actual path may vary according to the Apache configuration b Enter the command etc init d starquality stop 2 Run the installer application StarQuality v3 1 en bin 3 Press Ctrl C on the keyboard followed by Enter 2 11 3 Configuration Parameters I Follow the installation prompts and enter OS user of Oracle ORACLE HOME environment variable StarQuality OS user name Oracle host name localhost Oracle
20. on page 157 Oo E E M Measurements Display Options on page 158 E Viewing Measurement Data on page 163 M Searching Measurements on page 167 M Saving Items as Submenus on page 170 E Setting Trendlines to Graphs on page 171 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Introduction 5 1 Introduction Viewing measurements is available using a configurable quick menu at the top panel for displaying and navigation New elements can be added to the page using the Settings gt Customization menu see Customization on page 248 The Browser is also available for displaying navigation and filtering in the site equipment measurement hierarchy and it shows the measurements according to the measurement type Only those objects sites equipments or measurements for which the user has permissions are accessible The figure below shows the Browser and the Icon view of the selected hierarchy level Root ROOT operation CR Display deleted E Elements S Big setups Regular Setups Measurement types Big setups Regular Setups Figure 5 1 The Measurements Main Menu Item with the Browser and the Icon View The structure of sites is illustrated in the following figure StarQuality User Manual amp O amp Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Introduction Figure 5 2 Hierarchy of Sites StarQuality User Manual Se O 155 Chapter 5 Viewing Measure
21. 7 22 0F 69 Site Slot 3 2 Eadonent See ste Sota D Eaurent 0 00 10 7 22 5846 site sota Chart settings D Sage EE ste set E Equipment SU 00 10 7 22 90 34 Site Slot 1 D Seet See se sett E Equipment SU 00 10 7 62 1C 82 Site Slot 3 D aen DEE se sets D Equoment 5U00 10 7 2 16 38 ste s t 1 E Equipment SU 00 10 E7 E2 1E 8D Site Slot 1 F Equipment SU 00 10 7 E2 1F SF Site Set 1 D Seet Anere ste set 1 D Casen EE ste s t 1 D Sech EE se aa 8 4 j amj Figure 8 10 On demand Reports Measurement Types 6 Click Measurement Types in the selection path A list of available measurement types and calculations is displayed Jai E simple settings Per measurement type settings Advanced settings Measurement type Calculation EECH EEN IT Wimax 4Motion Average Spectral Efficiency Minimum za TC WIMAX AMoton Uptime IF Average I WMA FDD TFTP SU RATE AVERAGE I Mamun Day Week Month Year TC WMAX FDD TFTP SU RATE MAX F sm TC WIMAX FDD TETP SU RATE MIN C integral ae TC WMAX FOD TFTP SU RSSI AVERAGE I WMA FDD TFTP SU RSSI MAX TC WMAX FOD TETP SU RSSI MIN I MAX FDD TETP SU SNR AVERAGE Twix FDD TFTP SU SNR MAX I MAX Foo TETP SU SNR MIN I WMAX FOD TFTP Uptime IT WIMAX Too SU RATE AVERAGE TC WiMAX TDD SU RATE MAX IT WiMAX Too SU RATE MIN EI TC WMAX TOD SU RSSI MEDIAN al Fe E Figure 8 11 On demand Reports Measurement Types Settings 7 Select the measu
22. Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Generating the Expression Using Input Fields 2 Inthe Threshold Configuration page fill in or select the following fields as required The available parameters may differ depending on the equipment type and measurements The site and equipment of the measurement drop down fields are displayed only when opening the threshold editor from the main page If you edit the thresholds from the Equipment page you can choose the measurements belonging only to that specific one The measurement to be selected This may be an actual value or a trendline value linear polynomial difference etc Operator A relational operator within the expression like lt lt gt gt A condition like Successful or Unsuccessful In this case the second operand in the expression is irrelevant Compare value This is the second operand of the relational expression relevant only if a relational operation is used 0 Static value interpreted with the same measurement unit as the one displayed on the measurement chart If there is a single measurement in the sub expression the application draws a horizontal line on the measurement chart at the compare value Baseline value the average of the measured values calculated with the specified cycle and resolution or a multiple of the standard deviation Frequency In how many samples Based on the last x cycles Match in
23. E Elements Back a MacroBS_TDD Slot 2 Total Used MacroBS_TDD Slot 2 Total Used 1 Slot 2 Air Link Utilization Slot 2 CIR Allocated Slot 2 MIR CIR Allocated 1 Slot 2 Number Of Connected SUs 7 Slot 2 Subscription z Slot 2 Throughput 1 Slot 2 Total Used Capacity Rate Slot 2 Total Used Capacity Rate Slot 2 Total Used Capacity Rate Slot 2 Total Used Capacity Rate t StarQuality User Manual 2011 08 09 R1 BPSK 1 2 R3 QPSK 1 2 R4 QPSK 3 4 RS 16QAM 1 2 RE 16QAM 3 4 R7 64QAM 2 3 RB 64QAM 2 4 2011 08 10 2011 08 10 11 08 08 30 lt OZ voink EI pownink 2011 08 09 2011 08 10 20 30 R1 BPSK 1 2 R3 QPSK 1 2 R4 QPSK 2 4 RS 16QAM 1 2 R6 18QAM 3 4 R7 64QAM 2 3 RB G4QAM 3 4 Slot 2CIR Allocated Export to XLS siot 2 Allocated Export to XLS slot 2 Number Of Export to XLS Connected SUs 11 08 08 2011 08 09 2011 08 10 11 08 08 2011 08 09 2011 08 09 30 30 30 lt Uplink Downlink lt Uplink Downlini p Value 2011 08 10 2011 08 10 Figure 5 10 Measurements Small Charts Chapter 5 5 5 3 Chart Viewing Measurements Chart Settings Settings Using the Chart Setting group options you can define the display preferences ke To configure the chart settings I Foran individual equipment in th
24. FDD SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Air Link Utilization WOCC FOCC TOCC The utilization of available wireless link resources Total used symbols during the collection period as a percentage of total symbols available Air Link Utilization 100 x Zetal symbols Qty used Total symbols available Subscription HVWMP HEMP HTMP The throughput based on the total traffic rate taking into account the unusable gap period in each frame as a percentage of total provisioned MIR The higher this value the higher is the actual utilization by users of the provisioned MIR Subscription E if Constant throughput gt 0 then X Throughput Const throughput aeo E CIR amp MIR E Otherwise 100 x Throughput X CIR amp MIR Constant throuput Throuput 3 CIR amp MIR MIR CIR Allocated bits per second WPM FPM TPM The total Maximum Information Rate MIR for all BE and NRT services and CIR for RT and CG services provisioned to connected SUs StarQuality User Manual o Ee gt Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 2 FDD and TDD Traffic BS KPIs Continued KPI Code for Threshold and API Description FDD SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Stop time quarter i i i Provisioned MIR for BE and nRT registered Provisioned CIR for RT amp CG registered XMIRCIR 2 GE Stop time Start time Start time quarter 15min bps CIR Allocated bits per second WPC
25. Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description SINR Distribution Uplink E 25M2 ULSINR Distribution SINR lt 3dB 4SU1 Percentages of CPEs per SINR range UL SINR Distribution 3dB lt SINR lt 7dB 4SU2 a RE UL SINR Distribution 7dB lt SINR lt 11dB 4SU3 UL SINR Distribution 11dB lt SINR lt 15dB HASU4 UL SINR Distribution 15dB lt SINR lt 19dB 4SU5 UL SINR Distribution SINR gt 19dB 4SU6 E 30 UL SINR Distribution SINR 11dB till 15dB 4514 E 3 0M UL SINR Distribution SINR 1148 till 15dB v2 5 4d14 mr UL SINR Distribution SINR 15dB till 19dB 4S15 UL SINR Distribution SINR 15dB till 19dB v2 5 4d15 UL SINR Distribution SINR 3dB till 7dB v2 5 4d12 UL SINR Distribution SINR 5dB till 9dB HASI2 UL SINR Distribution SINR 7dB till 11dB v2 5 4d13 UL SINR Distribution SINR 9dB till 11dB HASI3 UL SINR Distribution SINR gt 19dB ASI6 UL SINR Distribution SINR gt 19dB v2 5 4d16 UL SINR Distribution SINR Below 3dB v2 5 4d11 UL SINR Distribution SINR less than 5dB 4SI1 StarQuality User Manual amp Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Spectral Efficiency Bits Bin E 25M2 MAX DL Spectral Efficiency 4SEM Peak and average spectral efficiency MAX UL Spectral Efficiency HASEA E er eg H 3
26. Setting the Report Range and Display 20003 Pa 2 RRE i 2 ER 5 67 8 9 Ppi 13 14 15 6 Bed WP 12 EEGEN 26 27 28 29 30 31 Week Month Year Day Week gt Month Year 2008 fa zl O Bey WI E 2004 2010 Feb Aug 2005 2011 Mar Sep 2006 2012 Apr Oct 2007 2013 May Nov 2008 2014 an Dec HEEN gt Day Week Conti Year Day Week Month Figure 8 19 Calendar views day week month and year for selecting the time interval To set report display options gt I Inthe Settings area at the bottom of the Browser select the type of report from the Type drop down list Table only No bars Grouped Sub columns are unified Separated Sub columns are not unified Sort by Sub columns are unified however the column used for sorting the table remains separated 2 Select the Show Date in Column option to display if the report includes dates INFORMATION These settings do not affect the export of reports to x s files StarQuality User Manual 8 6 8 6 1 Chapter 8 Reports Exporting Data from the StarQuality Database Exporting Data from the StarQuality Database There are two bulk export methods available M Using the internal Bulk Export Wizard M Using an external SQL based API Application Program Interface This section focuses on the internal Bulk Export Wizard For more information on the API refer to the relevant technical note Using the Bulk Export Wizard The Bulk Ex
27. StarQuality Oracle 2 4x 500 GB RAIDO StarQuality Oracle Tablespace 3 1x 500 GB Oracle Redo Log Assumes 15 min cycles data retention for 1 month and 1 hour averages data retention for 11 months 1 1300 BTSs 130 000 CPEs N 3 20 concurrent clients SolarisX86 10 64bit English 1 2 x Intel XEON E5630 2 4GHz 2 32 GB RAM 3 7 x HDD SAS 500 GB 15000 RPM The network card and RAID controller must be listed in their respective Solaris developer approved lists 1 1 x 500 GB OS StarQuality Oracle 2 5 x 500 GB RAIDO StarQuality Oracle Tablespace 3 1x 500 GB Oracle Redo Log Assumes 15 min cycles data retention for 1 month and 1 hour averages data retention for 11 months StarQuality User Manual 2 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database Installation on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system and perform all the tasks outlined in Section 2 2 1 below This installation type involves the installation of the following components E cygwin BW StarQuality The required steps are 1 Configure network ports Section 2 2 1 1 2 Install Cygwin Section 2 2 1 2 3 Install StarQuality Section 2 2 2 2 4 Load a StarQuality license Section 2 10 1 5 Run StarQuality Section
28. and the simple filter system used in other places For the Search menu item the StarQuality application performs character based case insensitive whole text matching Four special characters can be used in the search string M underline or question mark matches an arbitrary character M percentage or asterisk matches zero or more arbitrary characters Therefore for example the _apple search string results in all names whose second to sixth characters are apple regardless of case followed by an arbitrary string of characters that is for example Xapple123 aApPle 1AppleTree etc In other cases filtering charts editing etc the StarQuality distinguishes small and capital letters but the and characters do not have the special meaning mentioned above In order to search for text that includes a space include the space in the string for search For example lt space gt SU will result in all names including SU with a space proceeding it For more information refer to Site and Equipment Configuration on page 233 in Chapter 9 Search is relevant to names of sites equipment etc but not to IPs You can use the Measurements gt Search menu item for displaying actual measurements After searching use the view link next to the equipment to view the measurement charts To start searching for a measurement Specify a searching string using one of the
29. data for days Timeout sec Retries Default measurement interval Choose an icon Server group No server group defiried Collect data Iv Additional measurements LJ add new Measurement type Name Other f r pes zl Index DR parameters Switched 7 alllogin H Di login D Vv All process 0 All process SW 1 i Figure 4 15 Activating Data Collection UNIX 10 Change Server Group to Unix Linux and choose specific measurements or all measurements by selecting the corresponding check boxes 11 Scroll down and click OK to implement changes The Server field turns green which implies that collection is active StarQuality User Manual Se 8 O 151 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 4 Network Discovery Name IP address User Password Server group Server Previous server Collect data Keep collected data for days Default measurement interval Created by Created when Last modified by Last modified at Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 216 172 30 105 216 dadmin idadmin UniyLinux suen None Yes 365 15 min admin 2009 03 01 14 21 15 admin 2009 03 01 14 31 50 Figure 4 16 Data Collection Active UNIX R 000006 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements In this chapter Introduction on page 154 WIMAX Equipment Measurements on page 156 Measurements Browsing Options
30. max average dB All WSU1 E Min FSU4 E Min TSU1 The average maximum minimum SNR value of the signal from the SU E Max FSU5 E Max HTSU2 measured at the AU FDD Micro Base Station for the past 15 minutes Downlink SNR min max average dB E Avg FSU6 E Avg TSU3 The Average maximum minimum SNR value of the signal from the AU measured at the SU and reported over the air to the Base Station equipment for the past 15 minutes Uplink Rate min max average All WSU3 E Min HFSU7 E Min TSU5 From rate 1 BPSK 1 2 to rate 8 64QAM 3 4 Downlink Rate min max average E Max FSU8 Max TSU6 From rate 1 BPSK 1 2 to rate 8 64QAM 3 4 E Avg FSU9 E Avg TSU7 SU Acknowledged Bytes bytes N A FSUc Ver 3 8 only N A SU CRC Errors count N A HFSUj Ver 3 8 only N A SU Discard Bytes in ARQ bytes N A FSUg Ver 3 8 only N A SU Drop Bytes bytes N A FSUe Ver 3 8 only N A SU Drop Ratio w ARQ N A FSUk Ver 3 8 only N A SU Drop Ratio w o ARQ N A FSUI Ver 3 8 only N A SU Duplicate Discard Bytes bytes N A FSUf Ver 3 8 only N A StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Default Built in Reports Table 11 3 FDD TDD SU Performance KPIs File Collection KPI Code for Threshold and API Description FDD SNMP FDD TFTP TDD SU Throughput Bits per Second N A FSUa Ver 3 8 only N A SU Total Discard Bytes
31. 2 10 2 2 2 1 Pre installation Tasks 2 2 1 1 Configuring Network Ports Configure or verify that the following ports are open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements Table 2 3 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed equipment 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE App server managed equipment and other 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed equipment 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 16162 SNMP Setting up AlvariSTAR to discover StarQuality 10161 SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server StarQuality User Manual Gs amp 2 2 1 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing Cygwin Pre installation Tasks Cygwin is a UNIX like environment for Windows Always use the cygwin application to run StarQuality commands You can download the Cygwin Installation files from the Alvarion FTP Server or from the internet To install Cygwin I Download Cygwin files From the internet Make sure the Cygwin version you download includes the following packages Sapache bash coreutils cygutils expat gcc core gcc mingw g ess ibexpat1 ibiconv2 ibncurses8 ibreadline6 make openssh ping te
32. 23 11 45 00 Could not query the device using SNMP or PVSR was not running 192 168 198 11 2011 06 23 12 00 00 Could not query the device using SNMP or PVSR was not running 192 168 198 11 2011 06 23 12 15 00 Could not query the device using SNMP ar PVSR was not running 192 168 198 11 2011 06 23 12 30 00 Could not query the device using SNMP or PVSR was not running Figure 9 19 Missing Collection Intervals 6 From the list either select the first check box to mark all the BTSs for filling gaps or select individual BTSs by selecting the corresponding check boxes 7 Click the Download the XML and fill in the gaps link top of the screen active once you choose at least one BTS for gap filling StarQuality downloads the files processes them and loads them into the database During the operation it displays the progress StarQuality User Manual Se D 246 Chapter 9 General Setting Options 4Motion Data Collection Gap Filling T Site and equipment confi ea Seed gt Search for collection caps gt Download the XML files and fill in the caps Prey I Please wait Collection in progress 1 95 Currently collecting Date 2011 06 23 11 30 00 Equipment 192 168 198 11 Cancel Figure 9 20 Collection Filling Progress To stop the operation click Cancel Upon completion a results message is displayed Server process finished Name Date Result 30_08klar 2011 09 01 09 30 00 Used file management performa
33. 6 Bulk Delete Simple Search 2 Use the simple or advanced search to filter the elements to delete see Searching Objects on page 130 3 Use the check boxes to select the items to delete Delete non empty sites All the selected sites will be deleted even if they are not empty including everything below the sites Delete empty parent objects If by deleting an object its parent is left empty the parent object is deleted as well The deletion keeps propagating upward in the hierarchy if the parent s parent is left empty as a result it is also deleted and so forth Empty equipment objects are not affected by this command requiring distinct confirmation Delete empty equipments If by deleting an object its parent equipment is left empty the parent equipment is deleted as well 4 Click OK The list of all the items that fulfil your search criteria is displayed You can adjust the search results by entering new search criteria and running a new search 5 From the list either select the first check box to mark all the list for deletion or select individual items by selecting the corresponding check boxes StarQuality User Manual Se E 239 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations Options I Delete non empty sites I Delete empty parent objects IT Delete empty equipments OK Advanced Search object px parent yes result 500 search Type Name GER Parent name Vv Equipment Q 3 1 ve
34. 6 2 Threshold Template Configuration New StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates 3 Fill in the fields with the following information Name Template name For example FDD SNMP OCCUPATION too low Threshold name A unique and meaningful name that contains the names of the individual thresholds that will be created At least one of the following notations should be added lt equip number gt the name of the equipment of the measurement that corresponds to the variable with the given number lt var number gt the name of the measurement that corresponds to the variable with the given number Table 6 1 Threshold Name Examples Threshold Name In Template Actual Threshold Names lt var1 gt CPE drop lt equip1 gt BS 0 0 131 8 131 1 Active MS Qty CPE drop Browns Hill BS 0 0 131 8 144 3 Active MS Qty CPE drop Audet lt equip1 gt too many HO lt var1 gt Audet too many HO BS 0 0 131 8 144 1 Successful Ho Attempts Sainte Francoise too many HO BS 0 0 131 8 79 2 Successful HO Attempts Measurements within the same equipment Always select this option for system internal use Measurements with the same description Always select this option for system internal use Expression The threshold format See Step 3 below Validate Checks that the expression
35. Alarm Thresholds Editing Thresholds Editing an Existing Threshold Template Editing Thresholds When you edit an existing template on which active thresholds are based all these thresholds are automatically affected The system identifies and lists these potentially affected thresholds for approval To edit a threshold template 1 Do one of the following M From Settings select Templates gt Threshold Templates The Threshold Template Configuration list is displayed M From Settings select Site and equipment configuration Navigate to the equipment holding the threshold to be edited Scroll down to the thresholds list 2 Click edit next to the threshold template to be modified 01 MIB upload 02 Measurement type definition 03 Equipment templates 04 Threshold templates 05 Threshold template export 06 Threshold template import 07 Chart templates 08 Exclusion window templates 09 Time zones StarQuality User Manual edit del now del insts 1111 test edit del now del insts Motion BS or AU Not seen edit del EthernetOAM Availability lt x edit del EthernetOAM RTT gt x msec edit del now del insts Extreme BS or AU Not seen edit def now FDD BS or AU Not seen edit del now del insts FDD TFTP BS or AU Not seen edit del Host CPU usage gt x edit del Host disc usage gt x edit del Host memory usage gt x edit del Host
36. Alarms on page 197 M Downloading Data to Excel Files on page 202 7 1 Overview Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Overview Viewing Alarms is performed similarly to viewing measurements a configurable quick menu at the top panel is used for displaying and navigation and also new elements can be added to it using the Settings gt Customization menu The alarms are displayed on the most prominent parts of the user interface to provide quick accessibility The color coded summary of the currently active alarms are displayed at the top right corner of the window The alarms can be navigated by selecting the Alarms item on the main menu Critical 3 Major 2 Warning 1 Minor 3 20 Normak 2 D Q Figure 7 1 Alarms Summary at the Top Right Corner of the Window By default only the Root highest level group is listed The list view of alarms is displayed in the following figure Browser Time span Gi Gi View Filters Name Level Every one Type Eee Group alarms Every one zl Acknowledged OK mi gt To use the Alarms list ROOT a jax Operation F tink Figure 7 2 Table View of Alarms Use the following operations in the alarms list Table 7 1 Using the Alarms List To Do this Comments Move to next page entries on th
37. BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCH
38. Display Options Table 5 3 Chart Display Options Tooltip Description Small Charts The charts are arranged in a three column table Display Deleted Adds to the currently displayed measurements E Measurements from deleted equipments M After StarQuality upgrade measurements from previous versions Charts of previous versions are marked with a special suffix in their names A chart always uses the whole available area that is if you hide the menu system using the expand page icon or change the shape of the Browser window StarQuality redraws the chart s accordingly However you can collapse expand charts individually using the Expand Collapse StarQuality remembers the choice for every chart separately You can delete these settings and also change the default behavior of the charts page from Settings gt Customization gt Preferences Setting Preferences on page 248 Expand Collapse Icon Operation El Time span Business hours nen i S o e macroBs TDD Slot 2 Total Used Capacity Rate Downlink Export to XLS 9 MacroBS TDD Slot 2 Total Export to XLS Slot 2 Air Link Utilization Export to xis Used Capacity Rate Uplink From 2011 Hos Hos 12 ag Vol T To 2011 os 12 00 00 o0 IT E View Is bas x Display deleted E Split view E Chart settings
39. Done 2 6 2 4 StarQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts for the following M Operating system user name to be created StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 2 6 2 5 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M Operating system group to be created M Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality M Profile file to be used M Type of StarQuality installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr apache bin apachectl QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr apache bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run apache httpd pid QUESTION
40. ENNEN TE 10 2 1 3 HW SW and Disk Allocation Requirements E 10 2 2 Installation on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database ee ENEE 13 2 2 1 Pre installation TASKS EEN 13 2 2 2 installing Setart huerteg dreedeseregeEeed EENEG 20 2 3 Installation on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on the Same ET ln TEE 30 2 3 1 Pre installation Tasks suuvvanssdassvam rv veer eENNRENEC NEEN EKSNREAESNENEENEENER ENNEN ENN 20 2 3 2 Installing SG degt Seege EE 38 2 4 Installation on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine 48 2 4 1 Pre installation Tasks vu assmsameianivanmm mnd 48 2 5 Installation on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database xnrnnxnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenr 63 2 5 1 Pre installation Tasks asnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnvsnnnnnnnnnsrnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnernunnneenn 63 2 5 2 installing StarQuan ly sa4essraeeo ss et eke ae era EG 64 2 6 Installation on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine 70 2 6 1 Pre installation TASKS EEN 70 2 6 2 Installing E OUI irae ener nurmen a darea iS NaS 72 2 7 Installation on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine 78 2 7 1 Pre installation TASKS EEN 78 2 7 2 installing StarQUAlI RE aaa 80 2 8 Installation on Linux Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine 86 2 8 1 Pre installation TaSkS euggeegueieergeuggedeseeuuggeugeeeN a EEEE EEE 86 StarQuality User Manual SE al Contents 2 8 2
41. Equipment 1 1 3 1 WiMAX BreezeMAX FDD Ver 3 5 and later FDD SNMP Micro and Macro BTS BreezeMAX FDD Ver 3 7 and later FDD TFTP Micro and Macro BTS BreezeMAX TDD Ver 4 5 and later TDD TFTP Macro BTS only AMotion Ver 2 5M and later BreezeACCESS VL Ver 6 and later BreezeMAX Extreme Ver 1 5 and later StarQuality User Manual Se amp eo Chapter 1 Introduction Supported Equipment 1 1 3 2 Server Health HM AlvariSTAR Ver 4 0 and later HM Oracle database server E UNIX OS StarQuality User Manual Lid Chapter 1 Introduction System Data Structure System Data Structure The basic entities comprising the StarQuality network are Equipment also referred to as the device BTS Base Transceiver Station and SU for wireless networks AlvariSTAR Oracle database server and UNIX machine for Server Health Each piece of equipment belongs to a site Basic sampled unit SU Slot BS 7 times in each BTS for wireless networks BTS for common measurements AlvariSTAR Oracle database server and UNIX machine for Server Health Site a collection of equipments and or sites Each site can contain as many sites and equipment as required within a hierarchy Root a virtual site a collection of sites only A bare System contains only ROOT StarQuality User Manual Se amp Q 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction User levels and Their Settings User levels and Their Settings In StarQua
42. FPC TPC The Committed Information Rate CIR for NRT RT and CG services provisioned to SUs connected to the AU FDD Micro Base Station Stop_time_quarter i Provisioned CIR for nRT and CG registered XCIR x x 1000 x Stop time Start time Start time quarter 15min bps Throughput bits per second WT FT HTT Total symbols used Total symbols used in bytes considering rate x 8 Stop time Start time 15min ZRate Throughput x Total symbols available x T symbol bps StarQuality User Manual Ee Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 2 FDD and TDD Traffic BS KPIs Continued KPI Code for Threshold and API Description FDD SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Total Used Capacity Rate bps Throughput of each MCS for the uplink and downlink directions Total Used Capacity Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 WCR1 FCR1 TCR1 Calculation formula per each rate Total Used Capacity Rate 2 BPSK 3 4 WCR2 FCR2 N A Stop time quarter Total Used Capacity Rate 3 QPSK 1 2 WCR3 FCR3 TCR3 Total symbols available x T symbol bps Start time quarter Total Used Capacity Rate 4 QPSK 3 4 WCR4 FCR4 TCR4 Total Used Capacity Rate 5 16QAM 1 2 WCRS5 FCR5 TCR5 vne Total Used Capacity Rate 6 16QAM 3 4 HWCR6 FCR6 TCR6 Ae mnboulationitcte Total Used Capacity Rate 7 64QAM 2 3 WCR7 FCR7 TCR7 b bytes per symbol for this modulation rate Total Used Capacity
43. For binary values 0 is disabled 1 is enabled See sysctl 8 and sysctl conf 5 for more details Controls IP packet forwarding net ipv4 ip forward 0 Controls source route verification net ipv4 conf default rp filter 1 Do not accept source routing net ipv4 conf default accept source route 0 Controls the System Request debugging functionality of the kernel kernel sysrq 0 Controls whether core dumps will append the PID to the core filename Useful for debugging multi threaded applications kernel core_uses_ pid 1 StarQuality User Manual Se Dee 36 2 8 1 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Controls the use of TCP syncookies net ipv4 tcp syncookies 1 Controls the maximum size of a message in bytes kernel msgmnb 65536 Controls the default maxmimum size of a message queue kernel msgmax 65536 Controls the maximum shared segment size in bytes kernel shmmax 4294967295 Controls the maximum number of shared memory segments in pages kernel shmall 268435456 2 Verify that there is a minimum of 10 GB swap space Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements Table 2 12 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed equipment 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE App server
44. Host localhost _ 5 ER Login Administrator Pwd Directory opt starquality Cycle sec 60 The number of files in the tmp done 30000 directory of SQLLDR OK Cancel Figure 9 30 Editing Server Configuration 2 Specify the required information name host login password and the optional Param1 and Param2 3 Click OK 9 5 4 2 Adding a New Server Adding and deleting a server is possible for measurement SOAP secondary application manager and secondary event receiver servers When a measurement server is added a server group is also added to the table in the Server Configuration window gt To add a new server I In the Server Configuration window click add new The server Configuration editing window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZS Chapter 9 General Setting Options Start Stop Status of Servers Server configuration Name Server group MATTE Type Other Soar v Host Login Pwd Directory Figure 9 31 Server Configuration Adding New 2 Specify the required information Name type host login password and directory 3 Click OK 9 5 5 Start Stop Status of Servers This feature is available for the admin and administrator users only The page displays the current status of servers by color coding The columns of the table are identical to the table in Server Configuration on page 259 except for password You can
45. INFO Checking the environment of starq QUESTION What is the profile file of the user starq opt starquality bash profile INFO Setting the PS1 environment variable to u h INFO Setting the ORACLE HOME environment variable to home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 INFO Setting the LD LIBRARY PATH environment variable to opt starquality lib home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 1lib INFO Setting the PATH environment variable to usr local bin home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client_2 bin PATH INFO Environment checking is done INFO Searching for running StarQuality modules INFO Oracle checking QUESTION TNS name QUESTION Oracle host name localhost QUESTION Oracle port 1521 QUESTION Oracle service name QUESTION Oracle SID QUESTION Oracle SYSTEM user password CONFIRM Confirm the password INFO Attempting to tnsping db150 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to tnsping 192 168 10 101 1521 INFO Successful StarQuality User Manual Se amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the TNS name db150 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the SID db150 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the service name INFO Successful INFO Oracle checking successful
46. Installing StarQuality M Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality M Profile file to be used M Type of StarQuality installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr apache bin apachect1 QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr apache bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run apache httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc apache httpd conf QUESTION Authentication method to be used BASIC ldap password file radius password file INFO Creating backup etc apache httpd conf 20090512 122852 from etc apache httpd conf INFO Stopping Ap
47. Installing StarQuality ETE RE 88 2 9 Installation on Linux Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine 96 2 9 1 Pre installatio TASKS EE 96 2 9 2 Installing ne E 97 210 Running GEES 105 2 10 1 Loading a StarQuality IER 105 2 10 2 Running StarQuality on MEET 105 2 10 3 Running StarQuality Oe reiege Seege EC 108 2104 Configuration Parameter Ss us geep eee eege ege nennen 109 2 10 5 Data Aggregation and Data Retention Settings NNN 110 211 StarQuality Upgrade Lavuavv4qeaveeras ranna need 111 2 11 1 StarQuality Upgrade on VEER Eeer Eetue EENS 111 2 11 2 StarQuality Upgrade ale tee geess ege EENS 112 2113 Configuration Parametef Ssss a 113 2 12 Uninstalling Start egene eEge 114 2 12 1 Uninstalling StarQuality from Wumdows EE 114 2 122 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solarisa numre vimsnmmeninnransn 114 2 13 Installation Troubleshooting oiccscc ses tcc cceccce ces reeciexcessanceenersewsnsseccews iededbeecceceeneenete 116 Chapter 3 Getting Started E 118 3 1 e EEE EEE EEE eee 119 3 2 The Structure of Interface Windows NENNEN REENEN REENEN ENEE EE ENK 121 3 3 The Menu System E 122 3 3 1 DAT 122 332 Meas reMmeNntS issiskiria danian iaidd ana 123 3 3 3 REDOM TT 124 3 3 4 EENEG 124 3 4 Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy arnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen 126 3 5 General Esplanade EEN ge 127 3 5 1 Scrolling or Hiding the Submenu Hems EE 127 3 5 2 Usine the Display TaDS ee eege 127 3 6 Ebert 129
48. OPTIONS gege Sea enee Ee vr veve 166 Fig re 5 13 Advanced Searchissa a a E Na 168 Figure 5 14 Measurements Search Results uLuvudsnsmitemnsmemmnmeendiejedjjvvenvnndamndet 169 Figure 5 15 Setting Trendlines WMG OW wisssiscecicccnsaasnsnea ciate nannies tannnnnenaheneubannenaatienebeneisesaeeneausentel 171 Figure 5 16 Examples of Trendline Settings rnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 173 Figure 6 1 Threshold Template Configuration Template List ENEE 176 Figure 6 2 Threshold Template Configuration New 177 Figure 6 3 Expression Containing Multiple Variables AANEREN 181 Figure 6 4 Threshold Template Export ree eebe Seege eege Ee 183 Figure 6 5 Threshold Template IMport eege ege Eeer 184 Figure 6 6 Using Threshold Template 2 eteegtereette gege 185 StarQuality User Manual SE Figures Figure 6 7 Relevant EqUipmMentS sagaene SosasameGede 186 Figure 6 8 Threshold Template DetailS a nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnene 187 Figure 6 9 Items to Assign The Threshold rernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 187 Figure 6 10 Threshold Template Configuration Template List rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 188 Figure 6 11 Threshold Template Configuration Edrtmg Ae 189 Figure 6 12 Message on Template based Threshold Modification NEEN 189 Figure 6 13 Message on Template based Threshold M
49. Operation 05 Search for unsuccessful measurements T 05_02FDD Slot 2 Delete x 06 Bulk inactive equipment a Sap Sees I 08_19FDD Slot 2 Delete 07 Equipment configuration export I 08 22F0D Slot 3 Delete 08 Bulk equipment update e 09 SNMP discovery T 08 zem Slot 3 z Fill WIMAX 4M lleci 10 Fill WIMAX Motion collection gaps C 09 13500 DET FEE 11 Inactive sector merge I 09_13F0D Slot 2 Delete z 7 09_19FDD Slot 1 Delete z Figure 9 14 Inactive Sector Merge 2 From the list either select the first check box to mark all the inactive sectors for merging deletion or select individual sectors by selecting the corresponding check boxes 3 For each inactive sector select if to delete or merge with an available sector within the BTS in the Operation column Inactive sector merge I Equipment name Description Operation KR 05 02F0D Slot 2 Delete x Delete T 08_19FDD Slot 2 Merge into Slot 1 T 08_22FDD Slot 3 Figure 9 15 Inactive Sector Merge Operations 4 Click OK The merging or deleting process starts without confirmation Upon completion of the process a results message is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp De 244 Chapter 9 General Setting Options 4Motion Data Collection Gap Filling Site and equipment confi 4 Processing completed succesfully Equipment name Description Operation 05 02FDD Slot 2 Delete Back Figure 9 16 Inactive Sector Merge Process Completion 9 2 4 4Motion Data Col
50. Rate 8 64QAM 3 4 WCR8 FCR8 TCR8 Number of connected SUs WCS FCS TCS SUs with active services Uptime WUPT FUPT TUPT BTS uptime in seconds 11 3 3 2 SU KPIs Performance KPIs include the uplink downlink RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator SNR Signal to Noise Ration and modulation rate from rate 1 BPSK 1 2 to rate 8 64QAM 3 4 measurements for all SUS Note the following regarding FDD ver3 5 3 6 SUs SNMP based data collection M The number of SUs is limited to 10 per BTS M Only a single value per each KPI is displayed according to its value at the time of sampling StarQuality User Manual SS Ee Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 3 FDD TDD SU Performance KPIs File Collection KPI Code for Threshold and API Description FDD SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Uplink RSSI min max average dBm tone The value or E Min FSU1 All TSU4 The average maximum minimum RSSI value of the signal from the SU Avg E Max FSU2 measured at the AU FDD Micro Base Station for the past 15 minutes In WSU2 E Avg FSU3 TDD there is only Average Downlink RSSI min max average dBm tone The average maximum minimum RSSI value of the signal from the AU measured at the SU and reported over the air to the Base Station equipment for the past 15 minutes In TDD there is only Average Uplink SNR min
51. SUNWggrp found Package SUNWgtar found Package SUNWgzip found Package SUNWlexpt found Package SUNWsshcu found Package Package hdu found Package hr found Package hu found Done Checking required packages for the schematic map feature Package SUNWpng found Package SUNWzlib found Done Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detai be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program li Figure 2 66 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks 2 6 2 2 License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting 2 6 2 3 Connection Details of External Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user used during the Oracle installation After providing it it tries to determine the value of the ORACLE_HOME environment variable using that user and asks for confirmation QUESTION The OS user of Oracle oracle INFO Found Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 QUESTION ORACLE HOME environment variable export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1
52. StarQuality Table 2 4 Oracle Connection Parameters Parameter Description Comments System password and The password of the SYSTEM For internal Oracle oracle Confirm password user in the database 14 Click Next The Oracle Connection Tablespace parameters is displayed Point both CONF and DATA tablespaces to the Oracle data computer partition according to Table 2 2 Disk Allocation 15 Review the creation details of CONF and DATA tablespaces M starQuality Setup Bisi E Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle tablespace parameters Conf tablespace 5Q CONE File CHORACLEIPRODUCT 10 2 D ORADATALORCLI5Q CONF dbf Size 300M Data tablespace 5Q DATA File CJORACLEIPRODUCT110 2 0JORADATAJORCLISQ DATA dbF Size 10000m Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 20 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameters 16 Click Next The Oracle user parameters are displayed You can change and confirm the password StarQuality User Manual amp oa 27 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Ale x Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle user parameters User name 5Q User password oe Confirm password oe Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 21 Oracle Connection User Parameters 17 Click Next The Setup wizard is displayed prompting that the installation is complete
53. StarQuality User Manual Se 6 7 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Generating the Expression Using Input Fields Generating the Expression Using Input Fields This section provides basic rules for creating threshold expressions using input fields Input files are not available when creating or editing threshold templates You can use the input fields in the Threshold Configuration window Figure 6 14 available in the following cases M Creating or editing a threshold that is not template based M Locally modifying a template based threshold see Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change on page 190 To generate a threshold expression I Access the Threshold Configuration window Settings gt Thresholds gt Configuration Threshold configuration Name NN DAILY1CYCLE 4HOUR Simple mode Add to Expression Validate TDD vj BS i30 e Slot 8 Air Link Utilization z Input fields Uplink Trend Polynomial x 2 Lz Trend sample 11 Forward calculation 2 Baseline value z Average rlf2 deviation with Daily cycle 4 Hourly I sample based on the last 1 cycle Match in sample 1 Sample size 1 alidate Unless the following add elem are true Level Type None E mail SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert DO When Non stop v OK Cancel Figure 6 14 Threshold Configuration StarQuality User Manual Se amp D he
54. TopN Average Sector Throughput TopN IT Motion TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN I Extreme BottomN Uptime TopN I Extreme TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN IT Extreme TopN Throughput TopN I FDD BottomN Uptime TopN E FDD TFTP BottomN Uptime TopN I FDD TFTP TopN Air Link Occupation TopN E FDD TFTP TopN Air Link Utilization TopN T FDD TFTP TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN I FDD TFTP TopN Throughput TopN I FDD TopN Air Link Occupation TopN IT FDD TopN Air Link Utilization TopN I FDD TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN T VL TopN Throughput TopN IT noise median TopN Figure 8 15 Report Export 2 Select the report s to export by selecting the check boxes next to the names To export all the reports select the Name check box 3 Click Export The File Download prompt is displayed 4 Select if to save or open the reports as xm files eo To import a report s I From the Settings menu select Reports gt Report import The Report Import window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Chapter 8 Reports Importing and Exporting Report Definitions 01 Report variables 02 Report views 03 Report export 8 nn kb 04 Report import Input file Browse 05 Scheduled reports 06 Scheduled equipment send BIE Validate only Full process mis Figure 8 16 Report Import 2 Click Browse to find the report s to import 3 Select one of the following options Validate only Retur
55. Y Y Y 9 NE failure Ratio N Y Y Y 10 Authentication Reject Ratio N Y Y Y 11 Service Flow usage Ratio N Y N N 12 R6 MIR Throughput Oversubscription N Y N N 13 R6 CIR Throughput Oversubscription N Y N N 14 R3 Total MIR N Y N N 15 R3 Total CIR N Y N N StarQuality User Manual Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs 11 5 4 4Motion BTS KPIs The following table shows the 4Motion KPIs and their presence in each of the SW firmware versions Y Yes N No Some of the KPIs have been changed throughout the versions These changes are described in the Comments column INFORMATION NPU KPIs There are KPIs that are relevant only for NPUs working in non transparent mode You can find the items relevant for non transparent mode in the y release notes Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Active MS Idle MS E 3 0 Registered MSs Qty 4019 also 4NTI for ASN GW E idle MSs which have been Registered MS count E 30M connected to the BS but have no i Idle MSs Qty 4020 actual traffic to transmit or receive Idle MSs Ratio 4032 thus they are not occupying any sector resources Active MS Qty 4021 E Registered all connected MSs to the sector Active Idle ER E Active MSs which are currently using and occupying sector resources The MSs are sampled at the end of the 15 Min perio
56. a small screen ES Detailed Elements are listed under each other with a small icon name and description Display Deleted Adds to the currently displayed measurements BR Measurements from deleted devices E Measurements that were deleted or modified formula or unit between StarQuality versions View Options a Split view _SU00 10 E7 22 0F 1E Elements su00 10 7 22 0F 69 Back See SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E gt SEE SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 gt A E o SU00 10 E7 22 58 16 i SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 gt SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F 4 SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F gt gj 00107220 a su00 10 E7 22 90 34 SU 00 10 E7 22 90 DB gt SU 00 10 E7 62 03 3C gt sU00 10 7 22 90 DB SU 00 10 E7 E2 02 44 gt SU 00 10 E7 2 16 38 gt su00 10 7 62 02 3C Figure 5 3 Navigation between Measurements Detailed View StarQuality User Manual SS Se 8 o amp Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Displaying Elements Side by Side 5 4 2 Displaying Elements Side by Side You can display two lists of elements in the main area and compare elements To enable this option click on the Split view icon A drop down list is displayed enabling to select what to display on the right side of the main area There are two options Search a search page similar to the Measurements Search is displayed Search for an object and click OK The selected object appears on the right
57. and port localhost i f1521 Service name r SID SO System password o00000 Confirm password COTTI Figure 2 41 Oracle Connection Parameters StarQuality User Manual Gi amp O 44 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 12 Enter missing parameters and verify that the correct values are filled out in the following fields Table 2 6 Oracle Connection Parameters Substrate TNS name to be used for the database connection Parameter Description Comments Oracle Home The path to the Oracle Home Verify that automatic value is directory correct TNS The Transparent Network The TNS name appears in the tnsnames ora file on the StarQuality machine For internal Oracle SQ Host and port The host of the Oracle database server and the port used for connecting to it The default port for internal oracle is 1521 Host can be any of the following E localhost E Host name E iP E 127 0 0 1 Service name Service name of Oracle server client If this value is defined do not fill in SID For internal Oracle SQ SID Service ID in case service ID is defined in Oracle server client If this value is defined do not fill in Service name System password and Confirm password The password of the SYSTEM user in the database For internal Oracle oracle 13 Click Next The Oracle Connection Tablespace parameters window is displayed Poi
58. available on the operator network H The server is accessible from the StarQuality machine on port 25 M Authorization credentials user pwd for the SMTP server if required 10 2 2 Configuration In the file optstarquality et CONFIG_IN pm edit the following parameters and restart StarQuality Table 10 1 Configuring SMTP Connection Parameter Edit SMTP_SERVER localhost Replace localhost with the IP of the SMTP server SADMIN EMAIL ADDRESSES Enter an e mail address only if admin notifications are required otherwise leave as is Any number of e mail addresses can be defined separated by commas PVSR_EMAIL ADDRESS StarQuality This is the e mail address used as the sender for all outgoing e mail messages If the specified value does not contain the sign use the lt specified value gt lt hostname gt When specifying the value make sure the sender is acceptable by the SMTP server Example of a sender setting StarQuality alvarion com HSSMTP AUTH user pwd If user pwd are required by the SMTP server the line should be uncommented by removing the hash sign heading it and replacing the values with actual ones StarQuality User Manual Se E D Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI e mail and SNMP Notifications 10 3 e mail and SNMP Notifications 10 3 1 e mail Notifications and Traps of Threshold Crossing Events For any active threshold to which there are e mail and or SNMP
59. by default these values are shown Regardless of the preference settings you can turn these indicators on and off at any time 3 In the Key Bindings table set the shortcut keys for some frequent operations Click in the editable text field and press the desired key combination 9 3 2 Setting E mail Addresses Admin only All users except limited ones may set up one or more e mail address to which the system can send notifications on threshold violations A prerequisite to the actual e mail sending is that the StarQuality server has been configure with an active SMTP server gt To set an e mail address I From Settings gt Customization select E mail Addresses A list of addresses appears 2 Click add new The E mail Address Configuration window is displayed E mail address configuration Name E mail Bulk threshold e mail sending Vv OK Cancel Figure 9 23 E mail Address Configuration StarQuality User Manual Se Se D Chapter 9 General Setting Options Setting E mail Addresses Admin only 3 Specify the following Name It must be unique for each user This name will appear in the selection list for in the Thresholds Configuration window E mail The e mail address to where the messages should be sent Multiple threshold violations in one mail In case of a single sampling interval in which multiple threshold violations occurred it is possible to send the notification in a
60. can be configured using various operations available in one drop down menu at the right hand side next to the sites path This section describes how to use some of the operations in this menu NOTE i Some of the items in the menu are not applicable therefore are not described _ To use the operations drop down menu in equipment level Follow these guidelines see Figure 9 5 Table 9 3 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration To Select this menu item Comments View active alarms for Go to alarms this equipment View measurements Go to measurements for this equipment Perform discovery and Modify equipment Refer to Operations in Equipment edit this equipment Level on page 237 Edit this equipment Modify equipment without Refer to Operations in Equipment discovery Level on page 237 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations Table 9 3 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration Continued To Select this menu item Comments Start stop data collection Activate Deactivate data collection Refer to Activation Deactivation of Data Collection on page 139 Create new thresholds E New Threshold M New group threshold M New threshold from template Not applicable Edit charts Edit public charts Not applicable View CPEs under this equipment WiMAX Inventory repo
61. can still log in if SSH key based authentication is configured M Directory the directory of the StarQuality application The name of the directory should be an absolute path i e it should started with StarQuality User Manual Se E 260 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Server Configuration E Param1 and Param2 Further parameters depending on the type of the server displayed with the appropriate name Measurement server 0 Persistent SSH and SFTP connection Param1 Whether the SQLLDR and the MANAGER server can keep a persistent SSH and SFTP connection with the measurement server or not Persistent connection is strongly recommended since nonessential logins and logouts can be avoided There is only one case when non persistent connection is necessary in the case of certain former SSH implementations the established SFTP connection has fully utilized the CPU of the target machine even when no operation was executed How many seconds should the system wait for collector result if it is not running Param2 Application manager Cycle in sec The number of seconds waited between server monitoring Number of files During self testing the system checks the number of files in the tmp done directory that executes the data loading component If this is higher than the value specified here the system generates a server event and notifies the operator Data compression and moving and partition creation the
62. currently monitored and inactive report variables In a new system the table contains the variables used for the predefined reports Browser 01 Report variables e 02 Report viens Report variable configuration 03 Report export Detailed summary 04 Report import add new Variable name Measurement name Additional query at Interval When Active 05 Scheduled reports oes 06 Scheduled equipment send edit 4Motion Air Link Utilization ALL Air Link Utilization ALL ss Yes 900 pall Yes edit SE Average Sector Throughput iia aul Motion DL Air Link Utilization DL Air Link Utilization Data Non edit Data Zone Zone ds s stop Yes edit ZC lea da bet GC s vn edit oter Number Of Connected water Of Connected SUs EG Yes 900 Gs Yes Motion UL Air Link Utilization UL Air Link Utilization Data vi Non edit RE Yes ae e edit Motion Uptime Uptime E NAMENOTLIKE SU_ _ _ No ton SS Figure 8 1 Report Variables Window Example StarQuality User Manual QO 8 ES D Chapter 8 Reports Defining Report Variables gt To create a report variable I Click add new The following window is displayed 01 Report variables 02 Report views 03 Scheduled reports Variable name Measurement name Additional query 4 ey Addto Contains Z Add to Test first 100 hit Detailed summary at al equipment level Active NW whe o Cancel
63. details view for reference ES StarQuality Setup Se Installing Please wait while StarQuality is being installed Execute setup exe q R C starquality Extract vim 7 1 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin mininstall from releaselw32api Extract w32api 3 11 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality _install cygwin_min install_From release which Extract which 2 19 1 tar bz2 Output folder C starquality _install cygwin_min install_From release zlib Extract zlib 1 2 3 2 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY install Cygwin Install Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Execute setup exe q R C starquality Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 57 StarQuality Installing The last page indicates that the basic installation is complete StarQuality User Manual Se 8 E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks lel Es StarQuality basic installation complete Press Next to continue with the remaining installation steps Completed Apache stopped Add firewall port StarQuality WEB TCP 80 Wed Nov 5 17 24 27 2008 alert httpd Could not determine the server s fully qual Apache is running Configuring StarQuality Add firewall port StarQuality Chart Server TCP 4444 Checking Oracle parameters Output folder C starqualityopt
64. discarded VERd wireless medium containing CRC errors Errors Receive Other HVERO E Overrun The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded the processing Errors Receive Overrun HVERO capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port E Decrypt The number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism Errors Receive Phy HVERP M Other Receive errors other than previous KPIs M Duplicate frames discarded The number of data frames discarded because multiple copies were received If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be received more than once Although duplicate frames are included in all KPIs that include data frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port StarQuality User Manual Q Ee Gi Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 5 BreezeACCESS VL SU Performance KPIs Continued KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Errors Transmitted frames per second Errors Transmit Frames dropped too many retries VETD E Frames dropped too many retries The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully Errors Transmit Internally discarded MIR CIR HVETI retransmitted without being acknowledged until the Errors Transmit Other TX Events HVETO maximum permitted number of retransmissi
65. e g servers measuring IPSec where no discovery is performed Active but non discoverable the measurements are actively made by the StarQuality application through the available API but it is impossible to discover and monitor the measurements of the equipment This is typical when parameters need to be set for the measuring system in order to start the measurements e g one or more WEB server addresses should be given to measure HTTP services Passive and optionally capable of auto discovery the StarQuality only collects files containing measurement values in certain defined formats and optionally records and deletes the pieces of equipment and measurements based on the collected data The Servers menu includes five submenus described herein Licence Configuration Overview The licence for StarQuality is an encrypted file which defines BW Validity period either unlimited or temporary M Number of collector Network Elements NEs of any type BTSs only disregarding the number of AUs under each BTS No of SUs is unlimited except for FDD 3 5 3 6 10 SUs per BTS The installation CD includes a temporary licence file for a limited period of time and limited number of NES To acquire the permanent licence access the Alvarion on line feature licence application refer to Getting Feature Licenses Guide You will be required to provide the Oracle database ID You can find it by accessing Settings gt Servers gt License
66. error message should be reported to and resolved by the DBA Enter exit or quit to complete the procedure M The following Oracle database information should be available when installing StarQuality Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM user 2 8 2 Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Linux x86 operating system using the command line installer All operations should be done while logged in as root user a To install StarQuality Linux I Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 Follow the next sections for installation details StarQuality User Manual OQ e amp E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 2 8 2 1 Basic Checks The installer checks the following details RB Version of the operating system M Required packages RB Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation INFO Command line parameters INFO Installer started INFO LOG file tmp starquality install log INFO Checking perl version INFO Found perl usr local bin perl INFO Checking OS type INFO Found Red Hat 5 INFO OS Linux
67. few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically If you answer Yes the installer asks for various Apache files and the port to be used and then configures it The default answers given to the user during the installation represent the answers for the default Apache installation according to the operating system QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr sbin apachectl QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc httpd conf httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc httpd conf httpd conf 20110309 113933 from etc httpd conf httpd conf INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc httpd conf httpd conf INFO Using basic authentication INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server th
68. form the equipment configuration A Print option for Alarms Measurements and Reports because this is the only possible way to print the full content of the main display area the basic print function of the browser is not suitable for this For Measurements an option to save the current object as a menu item Operation v Print page Show history Show links Go to alarms Go to configuration Figure 3 5 Example of Operations pull down menu M A path at the top left showing the current location within the hierarchy It is always possible to click on the elements of this list except for the last one and return to a higher hierarchy level ROOT 4 ROOT gt FDD TFTP gt 10 0 16 10 SUs Figure 3 6 Hierarchy Path If during the navigation you access an equipment through one of its virtual sites then after any equipment modification you cannot get back to that point in the virtual hierarchy because the application will modify the current location according to the normal hierarchy i e it will show the equipment under its parent site Notice that by using the fast navigation between the menu items see the above bullet the current location within the hierarchy might change although the page will show the selected object the path shown to the root object might be incorrect StarQuality User Manual E 126 3 3 3 5 1 3 5 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started General Display Options General Dis
69. frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port StarQuality User Manual Q Ee 285 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic KPIs Continued KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Errors Transmitted frames per second Errors Transmit Frames dropped too many retries VETD E Frames dropped too many retries The number of dropped frames which are Errors Transmit Internally discarded MIR CIR VETI unsuccessfully retransmitted without being Errors Transmit Other TX Events VETO acknowledged Until the maximum permitted number of retransmissions Errors Transmit Underrun Events VETU E Underrun Events The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability M Other TX Events The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other KPIs E Internally discarded MIR CIR The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum permitted information rate Frames Received frames per second Frames Received Total HVERT The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames
70. from the Internet can be useful this file type can D potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Figure 8 24 File Download The default file naming format is StarQuality lt Report Name gt lt Date gt lt Time gt Report name is defined in Step 2 A B G D Es F G H l Report name 4Motion Center 1 Generation date 2009 06 21 15 53 52 Report type BTS Created by Administrator Remark free text Number of NE 1 Granularity level 15 Minutes Collection date from 2009 06 20 00 00 00 Collection date to 2009 06 21 00 00 00 Excel truncated No E 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 10 184 43 EA AC AA Ae AE AN AN 404 45 poenann Figure 8 25 Sample xls File StarQuality User Manual Se 8 ee Chapter 8 Reports Using the Bulk Export Wizard l gt To export SU data I From Reports select Bulk Export Wizard The Bulk Export Wizard window is displayed see Figure 8 20 2 Specify meaningful name and description free text 3 Select a time frame using the input fields or the calendar button Specify maximum one week Longer type results in an error message when trying to proceed to the next stage INFORMATION
71. from the list to assign to the threshold and click OK the system displays the threshold template details You can modify the attributes as required StarQuality User Manual Se amp Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments Threshold template FDD SNMP OCCUPATION Name Occupation downlink lt 50 Expression Variable 1 WiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample Level Juste zl Variable Measurement name Variables filter 1 Type None x E mail michal SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert NW When Nonstop zl OK Cancel Figure 6 8 Threshold Template Details 4 Click OK The system finds items AUs or SUs belonging to this BTS to which to assign the template 3 items found Threshold name Expression JW Occupation downlink lt 50 3 FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 Slot 1 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample IV Occupation downlink lt 50 4 FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 Slot 2 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample IV Occupation downlink lt 50 5 FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 Slot 3 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample OK Cancel Figure 6 9 Items to Assign The Threshold 5 Select the AUs SUs to assign the threshold to and click OK The threshold is added to the list of thresholds for the equipment StarQuality User Manual Se 8 ea 6 6 6 6 1 Chapter 6 Setting
72. i eee 229 Site and Equipment Configuration in the Settings VWumdow 234 Example of Equipment Modification Window E 235 Path Operations Drop down Menu in Site Level 236 Site Operations Drop down MENU mussmmesaesseremssieninviiisvmuueeisiervnivnk heie 237 Operations Drop down Menu in Equipment Level EE 238 Bulk Delete Simple Zpetelt eteeegereheeb deeg SSES EE 239 Item ee RE ET EE ie a nm etioatamneecanas 240 Unsuccessful Measurements Search zesegeskuee eguEugeEE ENEE SCENE ENEE ENEE 240 Selecting Inactive ECU TE E 241 Inactive Equipment Deactivation Confirmation EN 242 Inactive Equipment Search E 242 Inactive Equipment Deletion Confirmation rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnenennn 243 Inactive Equipment Deletion Confirmation sssssssssssssssunrnnrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnennn 243 Inactive Sector MGR Gree cates arene cnae saancesasienentrmtmanincendaxeuetaxeenainatebecanttealenumegaeedzeen 244 Inactive Sector Merge Operations wcsssssiessicscacsnatiansantumadondndeandnansananaanwncnnenien EES 244 Inactive Sector Merge Process Completion ENEE ENNER EEN 245 Search tor Collection Cie Si arver 246 Figure 9 18 Figure 9 19 Figure 9 20 Figure 9 21 Figure 9 22 Figure 9 23 Figure 9 24 Figure 9 25 Figure 9 26 Figure 9 27 Figure 9 28 Figure 9 29 Figure 9 30 Figure 9 31 Figure 9 32 Figure 9 33 Figure 9 34 Figure 9 35 Figure 9 36 StarQuality User Manual Figures No Collection Gaps No
73. local change in each of these thresholds To avoid loosing such local changes you may consider modifying the template and not the threshold itself Clock OK to save the modification the list of threshold templates reappears StarQuality User Manual Se amp a Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change 6 6 2 Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change Editing the threshold template itself will override any local change in thresholds To avoid loosing such local changes you may consider modifying the template and not the threshold itself gt To edit a template based threshold I From Settings select Threshold gt Configuration The Threshold list is displayed 2 Select a specific threshold and click edit the following message appears gt Browser Thresholds D ox Threshold configuration The threshold is based on the template FDD SNMP OCCUPATION If someone will modifiy the template later on then 04 Evart configsation the system might overwrite some of the values based on that users choise Are you sure you want to modify it Figure 6 13 Message on Template based Threshold Modification 3 Click OK the Template Configuration window is displayed 4 Modify the required threshold attributes You can use the input fields as described in Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 191 5 Click OK to save your modification to the threshold
74. main menu contains the main operation tasks of the system Alarms Measurements Reports and Settings Selecting each item on this menu opens various submenus and groups displayed in the submenu panel and in the browser For detailed structure refer to The Menu System on page 122 E Submenu panel the submenus under the selected menu item are displayed on the adjoining right hand side panel This panel can be scrolled up and down using the arrows on its right edge The submenu structure displayed here can be customized in order to accelerate the execution of frequently repeated navigation steps E The browser located on the bottom left side of the user interface The browser can contain further submenu items and special menu groups based on the chosen menu items in the upper menu system Non administrator users can only view those alarms pieces of equipment sites for which they have permissions Refer to User levels and Their Settings on page 5 The user name and type appears in the title of the web browser window StarQuality User Manual Se amp D 121 3 3 The Menu Chapter 3 Getting Started System The Menu System The following sections describe the main menu the submenus under it and the menu items and groups appearing in the browser These items vary depending on the selected item in the main menu For example Time Span is displayed only when selecting Measurements or Alarms in the main menu see M
75. managed equipment and 162 SNMP Outbound towards other NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed equipment 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in 16162 SNMP order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server StarQuality User Manual Se amp D Q Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 2 8 1 3 Installing Oracle Server Follow these guidelines M Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server version MI install Oracle Server according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation M Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes Oo Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation M During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality should be available M To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sq p us utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and the system password is oracle use a console logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme If the SQL prompt is displayed connectivity to the database server is confirmed Any
76. of the template in the source system does not exist in the destination system E Joe if the type name selected for the template in the source system does not exist in the destination system StarQuality only displays a warning message and the field remains empty E Z mail StarQuality only assigns the e mail address for the template if the e mail address from the source system exists among the e mail addresses configured by the importer and the user had not configured this e mail twice gt To export a threshold template s I From the Settings menu select Templates gt Threshold template export The Threshold Template Export window is displayed alarms E SETTINGS gt 8 Search Measurements OL Search os Reports E 0 Reports Settings 07 Servers 01 MIB upload 02 Measurement type definition Threshold template export 03 Equipment templates 04 Threshold templates D WEE 05 Threshold template export 06 Threshold template import mi 1111 test EE mi aMotion BS or AU Not seen 08 Exdusion window templates 09 Time zones D EthernetOAM Availability lt x LJ EthernetOAM RTT gt x msec RS Extreme BS or AU Not seen LJ FDD BS or AU Not seen RS FDD TFTP BS or AU Not seen Bj Host CPU usage gt x EI Host disc usage gt x r Host memory usage gt x EI Host virtual memory usage gt x m Interface error gt x m Interface traffic gt x bps mj Orade Block changes second gt x D Orade Block changes
77. or not since the query examines data collected earlier too As a hint the current time interval is indicated in green with the number of measurements running with that interval If you select a different interval the Statistics page is automatically displayed 3 Click the view link in the first column A page identical to the one displayed from Settings gt Measurements gt Summary is displayed filtered by the selected measurement server I Browser Servers 4 o 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary Summary table for all equipments 03 Server groups Site name Equipment IP address FHCA Sum 04 Server configuration name 05 Start Stop Status 8 A S OG Server ove view SERVER HEALTH 172 30 105 210 172 30 105 210 16162 37 37 07 Collector load view SERVER HEALTH A 2 172 30 105 210 16162 37 37 EEE Number of measurements 00074 74 Summary ts Sa 2 Number of measurements per equipments Ster 0004 4 Figure 9 35 Collector Load Statistics 4 You can view the list of measurements that were unsuccessful at a given time by clicking on the view link The list of devices and measurements are displayed together with another link that opens to the configuration panel of the device StarQuality User Manual Se amp D 260 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Viewing Collector Load Information op Status load Collector load Back The measurements below were not successful at the given time Parent nam
78. port Oracle service name Oracle SID Oracle SYSTEM user password The system runs DB update scripts StarQuality User Manual Se oa Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Uninstalling StarQuality 2 12 Uninstalling StarQuality 2 12 1 Uninstalling StarQuality from Windows gt To uninstall StarQuality from Windows I Run the UninstallStarQuality exe in the Cygwin root directory or select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs A Fill in the SYSTEM password oracle and click Uninstall M StarQuality Uninstall Dis x Oracle connection The SYSTEM user will be used to drop the StarQuality Oracle user User name SYSTEM Password o00000000 Confirm password o00000000 Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 73 Uninstalling the Oracle User 2 12 2 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris E gt To uninstall StarQuality from Solaris I Log on to the StarQuality machine as root 2 Stop any running StarQuality module a From Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status StarQuality User Manual Se D Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris b Click stop all and wait until all the entries of the list are red 3 Inacommand window run UninstallStarQuality from the StarQuality installation directory default optstarquallty 4 The application prompts for various confirmations Follow the instructions and questio
79. red if the most severe active alarm of the equipment under the given site is Major then its color is orange and so forth During navigation the navigation path is displayed in the top line above the middle viewing area under the name of the tab which can be used to quickly navigate up to higher levels by clicking on its segments In the Object view three further icons are available which are used to further simplify the object view M Icon view The sites containing alarms are displayed with large easy to see icons up to five in a row ROOT Operation sl uink ES ei fm ae Vw TESTS ii K Miss7s vom ru r D ER Bis ST 9 2 D 2 I 25 26 27 28 29 Week Month Year Figure 7 4 Icon View of Alarms M List view The sites containing alarms are displayed with smaller icons up to five in a row allowing more icons to be displayed on a single screen Icons with alarms can easily be identified based and their color codes StarQuality User Manual Se Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Alarm Display Options ROOT D Dix Mar ris aa Mo Mis s 75 IHR oe 5 T 8 28 2 Ei R Z e 2 G t t t Week Month Year Figure 7 5 List View of Alarms E Detailed view The site equipment icons are listed one under another still colored together with their names and descriptions Level Name Des
80. single e mail bulk instead of sending them separately The bulk mail is less detailed than the separate e mail From StarQuality css xp01 mailto StarQuality amp css xp01 Sent Sunday May 24 2009 3 32 PM To User Subject StarQuality Throughput lt 2 mbps Major Violated threshold Throughput lt 2 mbps Type Level Major Time 2009 05 24 15 30 00 Measurement values Site name Equipment name Measurement name First value Second value FDD TFTP 10 10 184 1 Slot 3 Throughput 641797 76 365210 56 Figure 9 24 Example of Separate Threshold Violation Notification StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 252 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Templates admin only 9 4 Templates admin only From StarQuality css xp01 mailto StarQuality css xp01 Sent Sunday May 24 2009 3 02 PM To User Subject StarQuality Alarms Figure 9 25 Example of Bulk Threshold Violation Notification In the Templates menu item you can create and manage templates for measurements equipment and thresholds NOTE e Some of the items in the browser are not applicable therefore are not described The applicable items ji are described in Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 174 The following settings are available from the browser M MIB upload Not applicable Uploading the SNMP MIBs files to the system HM Measurement type definitions Not applicable Editing measurement definitions E Equipment templa
81. start and stop the servers and check for their status manually in addition to the automatic server check of the application manager The page is continuously refreshed After starting and stopping server s the subsequent refreshing also checks their status The servers can be in three different statuses Running Not running and Unknown Unknown status means that it cannot be determined whether the server is running or not for example it is impossible to login with the specified data to the computer running the server Only measurement servers with running statuswill be assigned to measure equipments A server may be configured to the equipment and another server is modified to be a secondary measurement server Each measurement server measures all those pieces of equipment where it is a primary or secondary server and after a certain period it deletes secondary server registrations where it is the primary server Due to this algorithm no measurement would be omitted even if for example in a measurement server group one of the servers is started when another server has already been run even though load balancing transfers a certain part of the equipment both of them will measure the transferred pieces of equipment temporarily StarQuality User Manual Se E 263 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Viewing Server Events gt To use the Server Start Stop Status window I From Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status
82. the entries are not marked red which indicates invalid licences that should be replaced 5 If necessary load a new license file using the WEB GUI see Configuration Parameters on page 109 Do one of the following M Return to the StarQuality server machine console and enter the command etc init d starquality start M Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click start all Wait for the list to refresh 7 In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click Check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are green _ To stop the server I While logged in as root user enter the command usr apache bin apachectl stop The actual path may vary according to the Apache configuration 2 Doone of the following Return to the StarQuality server machine console and enter the command etc init d starquality stop In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click stop all Wait for the list to refresh 3 In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are red 2 10 4 Configuration Parameters M lf you are using 4Motion devices depending on their versions you may need to set up StarQuality accordingly For details see 4Motion on page 293 StarQuality User Manual Se SS Chapter 2 Sta
83. time of running HH MM These servers execute operations once a day though they are continuously running Partition creation is an exception since the daily operation is executed immediately at startup Threshold procession and report creation the maximum time period in hours of former data to be processed at startup At startup both of these servers determine the time up to which the individual thresholds as well as report variables were processed and if the hour of the last processing is smaller than the current hour minus the specified time period then they consider the processing to be done up to the current hour minus the specified time period For example if the five minute thresholds were processed by the server up to 8 55 and it is restarted at 18 05 same day and the set value is 6 then processing will only be continued from 12 00 9 5 4 1 Editing Server Configuration During the configuration of the servers the following fields can be modified name host login password and the optional parameters The host login and directory parameters can only be modified if the given server is not running me gt To edit a server configuration I Click edit next to one of the entries the Server Configuration editing window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS Chapter 9 General Setting Options Server Configuration Server configuration Name Application manager
84. to 65 000 entries E Selecting the KPIs to export M Selecting the time frame not limited to one week The API outputs data to the database or to any file format API is documented separately StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 229 Chapter 9 General Setting Options In this chapter Overview on page 231 Site and Equipment Configuration on page 233 Customization on page 248 Templates admin only on page 253 Server Configuration and Management Admin only on page 255 9 1 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Overview Overview The Settings item in the main menu contains many options for configuring the StarQuality system For each item in the submenu panel different items appear in the Browser depending on the access rights of the user This chapter describes the general setting options available in the StarQuality application for an admin user Some of the settings are directly involved with the main system functionality and therefore are described in the relevant chapters throughout this manual Such settings appear in the following list with a reference to the exact location of their description NOTE Some of the items are not applicable therefore are not detailed I Search Setting the searching parameters Refer to Searching Objects on page 130 2 Site and equipment configuration Creating deleting and managing elements refer also to Chapter 3 Gettin
85. transaction gt x ml Orade Buffer hit lt x D Oracle Commits second gt x Figure 6 4 Threshold Template Export StarQuality User Manual Se 8 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates 2 Select the template s to export by selecting the check boxes next to the names To export all the templates select the Name check box 3 Click Export The File Download prompt is displayed 4 Select if to save or open the reports as xml files To import a threshold template s I From the Settings menu select Templates gt Threshold template import The Threshold Template Import window is displayed 01 MIB upload 02 Measurement type definition Threshold template import 03 Equipment templates 04 Threshold templates Input file 05 Threshold template export 06 ee Processing mode Validate only Full process 07 Chart templates 08 Exclusion window templates Import 09 Time zones Figure 6 5 Threshold Template Import 2 Click Browse to find the report s to import 3 Select one of the following options Validate only Return to the original values after the operation The report is not imported Full process Apply all the changes after the import 4 Click Import The threshold template is added to the templates list StarQuality User Manual Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Assigning Threshold Templates to Equi
86. virtual memory usage gt x Threshold template configuration Threshold name 1111 test lt var1 gt lt equip1 gt lt equip gt lt descr gt Not seen lt varl gt lt lt input 1 gt lt varl gt gt lt input1 gt msec lt equip gt lt desa gt Not seen lt equip gt lt desa gt Not seen lt equip gt lt descr gt Not seen lt equip1 gt lt var1 gt gt lt input1 gt lt equip1 gt lt var1 gt gt lt input1 gt lt equip1 gt lt var1 gt gt lt input 1 gt lt equip1 gt lt var1 gt gt lt input1 gt No lt equin1 gt lt var1 gt Level Type Expression Warning BS or Warning Sg Search 1 Variable 1 WiMAX 4Motion Active MS Qty Table gt 5000 0 1x in 1 samp Variable 1 WiMAX 4Motion Seen Table 0 1xin 1 sample The expression is wrong because the variable type is unknown O amp EA The expression is wrong because the variable type is unknown DER Variable 1 WiMAX Extreme Seen Table 0 1xin 1 sample Variable 1 WiMAX FDD Seen Table 0 ix in 1 sample Variable 1 WiMAX FDD TFTP Seen Table 0 ix in 1 sample Variable 1 SNMP CPU usage Table gt INPUT 1 ix in 1 sample Variable 1 SNMP Disc capacity usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample Variable 1 SNMP Memory usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample Variable 1 SNMP Virtual memory usage Table gt INPUT 1 1x in 1 sample Variable 11SNMP E
87. working area When located at the sites level of the hierarchy the Operations drop down menu at the right hand side next to the sites path provides some navigation and viewing options The second Operation drop down menu at the top left of the sites lists provides operations for creating and modifying sites and equipment When located at the ROOT level of the hierarchy the equipment related items are not displayed This section describes how to use some of the operations in these menus NOTE Some of the items in the menus are not applicable therefore are not described gt To use the path operations drop down menu in site level The following operations are available for viewing site data see Figure 9 3 M Goto Alarms Opens a list of the open alarms under the current branch of the network E Go to measurements Opens the measurements view of this branch of the network StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 235 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Work Area Operations M WiMAX inventory report Displays a table of the CPEs connected to the network elements in the current branch of the network The information includes BTS no BTS name by StarQuality Serving BS and CPE MAC address Site and equipment confi 4 ROOT gt FDD_CSLAB Path Name FDD CSLAB Server group WiMAX FDD TFTP Operation EN Name Type Donen Back edit 3 10 10 184 1 SUs Site add edit del ka
88. 0 Average Spectral Efficiency HASEA E 30M Max Spectral Efficiency 4SEM Be Average Spectral Efficiency v2 5 4SU0 DL Spectral Efficiency Data Zone 4SED DL Spectral Efficiency FFR Reuse 3 Zone HASEF UL Spectral Efficiency Data Zone 4SEG Throughput Bits per Second E 25M2 Average Sector Throughput 4 AST Throughput per BS each E 30 Average Sector Throughput FFR Reuse 3 4AS3 WEE SE E 30M throughput of the passed sampling Average Sector Throughput MIMO A BF 4AS1 interval of 15 minutes Average Sector Throughput MIMO B 4AS2 Average Sector Throughput Total Reuse 1 4AS6 StarQuality User Manual Q D Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued 4Motion BTS KPIs KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Uplink Dropped HARQ E 25M2 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 16QAM 1 2 4E06 Error rate of dropped packets after e EE Se l UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 1 2 4E08 uplink direction UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 2 3 4E09 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 3 4 4E10 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 5 6 4E11 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 H4E04 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 H4E03 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 H4E02 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4E01 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 3 4 4E05 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate Total 4E00 StarQual
89. 0M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ CONF this could take several minutes ERROR The tablespace SQ CONF already exists QUESTION The tablespace SQ CONF already exists do you whish to continue Y N Y QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ DATA QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace file D ORACLE ORADATA DB150 SQ DATA 01 dbf QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes ERROR The tablespace SQ DATA already exists QUESTION The tablespace SQ DATA already exists do you whish to continue Y N Y QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user name SQ QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user password INFO Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes StarQuality User Manual Se E 103 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality ERROR The user SQ already exists QUESTION Do you want to continue with the schema creation Y N Y INFO Oracle user SQ created 2 9 2 7 Completing the Installation I The installer generates the schematic maps and exits INFO Redrawing schematic maps INFO Installer ended 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Configuration Parameters on page 109 StarQuality User Manual Se amp ee Q 2 10 2 10 1 2 10 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Running StarQuality Running StarQuality Loading a StarQual
90. 10 Sample XLS File of Chart Data StarQuality User Manual Ss Se E Ge 203 Chapter 8 Reports In this chapter Overview on page 205 Report Configuration on page 206 Importing and Exporting Report Definitions on page 217 Scheduling Report Delivery on page 219 Viewing Reports on page 221 Exporting Data from the StarQuality Database on page 224 Chapter 8 Reports Overview 8 1 Overview StarQuality enables generating reports for analyzing the collected data on a chosen set of sampled objects AUs SUS measurements in the system Administrator users can configure selected subsets variables and reports views Each report can be generated using one of the following methods M Pre defined and configurable reports summarizing measurements per day week month When installed the system already contains the same set of four reports for most device types BottomN Uptime TopN Air Link Utilization not applicable to BreezeACCESS VL and Extreme TopN Sector Throughput TopN Number of Connected SUs not applicable to 4Motion For details on device specific pre defined reports refer to Chapter 11 M Bulk export wizard reports the wizard is embedded in the client and generates reports for a limited amount of database data up to 65000 entries by cross selection of chosen NEs and date range The report outputs in xls format M Oracle data API Application Program
91. 10 10 184 1 Equipment FDD Macro BS ere Community Operations Drop down Menu 10 10 184 1 public Figure 9 3 Path Operations Drop down Menu in Site Level gt To use the site operations drop down list in site level Follow these guidelines see Figure 9 4 Table 9 2 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration To Select this menu item Comments Create a new site New Site Refer to Operations in Site Level on page 235 Discover equipment in the site Delete multiple elements New equipments plural from template Bulk Deletion Refer to Manually Activating WiMAX Devices Discovery on page 135 Refer to To delete multiple elements on page 238 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 9 General Setting Options Work Area Operations Site and equipment confi 4 Eis ROOT gt FDD CSLAB Operation z Name FDD_CSLAB Server group WiMAX FDD TFTP Site Operation z Name Type Description Operations New site wm New sites from file New public virtual site Drop down jew equipment EE New equipment from template M New equipments from template enu Bulk measurement discovery 5 mde 10 10 1841 Bulk deletion ka 10 10 184 1 Equipment FDD Macro BS New public virtual equipment Community public Edit public charts Figure 9 4 Site Operations Drop down Menu 9 2 2 3 Operations in Equipment Level Equipments
92. 175 Creating and Editing Threshold Templates on page 176 Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates on page 182 Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates on page 183 Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments on page 185 Editing Thresholds on page 188 Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 191 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Overview 6 1 Overview Thresholds are defined in the StarQuality system in order to trigger alarms when their definitions are contravened violated The defined thresholds can be complex expressions using different measurements of the same equipment This section describes how to create threshold templates and assign them to equipments StarQuality User Manual Se SE Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates 6 2 Creating and Editing Threshold Templates Creating thresholds using a template enables the creation of more thresholds even for the same measurement First you create the template and then you assign it to equipment You can also configure the assigned threshold locally A threshold template can be configured for automatic assignment for newly discovered NEs either CPEs or BTSs This means that when a new NE is introduced into the network it will be assigned the automatically activated template Refer to Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates on page 182 gt To create a new t
93. 2 114 B ezeACCESS VL eieiei 283 UN VNR 283 11 4 2 Network Discovery PrerequisiteS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 283 11 4 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIS rrnnnnnrennnnvnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnenrennnnnnvnnsennnnnnnnnsesnen 284 11 4 4 Default Built in Kette gesuerg ENEE 292 11 5 Ne 293 11 5 1 Network Discovery PrerequisiteS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 293 152 General Setti Ssnin E a N NONS 293 11 5 3 4Motion Version M n gementu uvenn NES ENNEN 294 11 5 4 4Motion BTS E eene ee 301 1155 ASN GW TE 312 VEE MSK Jr 314 La BreezeMAX EXtremMe v veseesmagqassemuemn ksene 317 VEE e EE 317 11 5 9 Network Discovery PrerequisiteS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 317 11 5 10 Extreme BIS KPS risian Aa EE S 317 StarQuality User Manual SE Ge o Contents 11 5 11 Extreme MS KPIS eitgiaibege deed EE dE EES 319 Eg EE E EE EEE EEE 321 StarQuality User Manual amp i Tables Tables Table 1 1 User Levels nd PermiSSiOnS vciccccsssecsnsscacnccansisnancennnanencnsndnesnnnhinndsiensdensinnhvetctednennsinateabdeaaie 5 Table 2 1 Selecting Installation Types risicsisnsictcenestsonesancnsnacxnncasnenses ENNER ASS EE NSERN EEN EEEREEN ENNEN ANEN 8 Table 2 2 Requirements Based on Capacity arnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnen 11 Table 2 3 Network PS S vde
94. 3 Fig re 2 16 Oracle Directory E 24 Figure 2 17 Installation e 25 Figure 2 18 StarQuality Windows Service Registration EEN 25 Figure 2 19 Oracle Connection Parameters rnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnennnnnnnnnr 26 Figure 2 20 Oracle Connection Tablespace BDarameters ANEN 27 Figure 2 21 Oracle Connection User Parameters AAR 28 Figure 2 22 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation NN 28 Figure 2 23 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program Window anaxunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 33 Figure 2 24 Choose a Download Source Window REENEN ENNER REENEN 34 Figure 2 25 Select Root Install Directory Window REENEN 34 Figure 2 26 Select Local Package Directory Window EEN 35 Figure 2 27 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State 35 StarQuality User Manual G Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 2 33 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figure 2 42 Figure 2 43 Figure 2 44 Figure 2 45 Figure 2 46 Figure 2 47 Figure 2 48 Figure 2 49 Figure 2 50 Figure 2 51 Figure 2 52 Figure 2 53 Figure 2 54 Figure 2 55 Figure 2 56 Figure 2 57 Figure 2 58 Figures Select Packages Window All Install REENEN EEN 36 Select Packages Window Perl Version ENEE ENEE 37 Cygwin Installation ee 37 Cygwin Installation Egeter eebe here EE
95. 3 7 Searching Obeds issi cece ds etter ekg perai eee 130 Chapter 4 Network Discovery ses resgeagebes gue aana d ENEE RES REES 131 4 1 GE NE ENE EE NE NN eee ons 132 4 2 Discovery of WiMAX Kreta EEN Ee 135 StarQuality User Manual ES oO Contents 4 2 1 Manually Activating WiMAX Devices Discovery 135 4 2 2 Setting Automatic Discovery of Equipment from AlvariSTAR E 137 4 2 3 Activation Deactivation of Data Collection rnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnennnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 139 4 3 Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 142 Chapter 5 Viewing MeasurementS arnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 153 5 1 age et H E 154 5 2 WiMAX Equipment MeasurementS rarannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnn 156 5 3 Measurements Browsing OptiOnS x xrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneuen 157 5 4 Measurements Display OptiOnS ararnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnenennnnnn 158 5 4 1 Viewing OPHONS Larnaka aat 158 5 4 2 Displaying Elements Side Dy Side rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 159 5 4 3 Element Browsing OP HONS eege EE 160 5 4 4 Operations Drop Down Menu Options ENEE 161 5 5 Viewing Measurement Data r nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnn 163 5 5 1 Viewing Measurements by Time Span ENEE 163 5 5 2 Chart Disp
96. 345 67 GOLNODO Samu 2B 14 Uplink Downlink DI Pv s i m 2 PE EECH tname y Average A E Maximum Minimum A Average F Maximum Y Minimun 22 23 24 25 2 27 2 aut 29 30 31 1 MacroBS_TDD 10 10 144 11 Slot 2 Air Link Utilization 31 82 29 82 Day Week Month Year 23 92 3 MacroBS TDD 10 10 144 11 Slot 1 Air Link Utilization 23 92 E Settings 23 92 Type ype Grouped RW BEE apen 10 10 144 11 Slot 3 Air Link Utilization Show date E column f Export current table to XLS Export all data to XLS Flash e e Indicator Common Y prefix automatic C None EI Ee Figure 8 18 Reports Window 8 5 1 Navigating Report Views Use the following buttons Table 8 1 Navigating Reports Button Link Description oo Go to the first and previous page respectively Go to the next and last page respectively ov Page x out of total number of pages Jump directly to the required DA page by entering its number in the text field and pressing the enter key Up and down arrows for ordering all results on the given level The e o current ordering is indicated by a blue rectangle around the selected arrow StarQuality User Manual WI TE Chapter 8 Reports Setting the Report Range and Display Table 8 1 Navigating Reports Continued Button Link Description Export current table to XLS Exports the currently displayed entries to an XLS file
97. 3dB lt SINR lt 17dB HASD4 DL SINR Distribution 17dB lt SINR lt 21dB 4SD5 DL SINR Distribution 21dB lt SINR lt 25dB 4SD6 StarQuality User Manual Q Ee Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued 4Motion BTS KPls KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description SINR Distribution Downlink E 3 0M DLSINR Distribution SINR 13cB till 17dB 4SD4 Percentages of CPEs per SINR range Glen M 3 5 DLSINR Distribution SINR 13dB till 17dB All 4054 EE DL SINR Distribution SINR 13dB till 17dB FFR Reuse 3 4sd4 DL SINR Distribution SINR 13dB till 17dB v2 5 4d08 DL SINR Distribution SINR 17dB till 21dB 4SD5 DL SINR Distribution SINR 17dB till 21dB All 4055 DL SINR Distribution SINR 17dB till 21dB FFR Reuse 3 4sd5 DL SINR Distribution SINR 17dB till 21dB v2 5 4d09 DL SINR Distribution SINR 3dB till 9dB v2 5 4d06 DL SINR Distribution SINR 3dB till 9dB 4SD2 DL SINR Distribution SINR 9dB till 13dB 4SD3 DL SINR Distribution SINR 9dB till 13dB All 4053 DL SINR Distribution SINR 9dB till 13dB FFR Reuse 3 4sd3 DL SINR Distribution SINR 9dB till 13dB v2 5 4d07 DL SINR Distribution SINR gt 21dB 4SD6 DL SINR Distribution SINR gt 21dB All 4056 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued KPI Version
98. 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 7 Fill in the required information for parameter information and description refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 135 Name and description free text Connection TNS name gt User system Password SYSTEM password Right SYSDBA SYSOPER Normal according to security preferences Leave all other fields with their default values 8 Click OK Discovery is running and can take up a few minutes The following window is displayed Red fields mean that collection is not activated by default Name OR2 Connection xe User system Password SYSTEM password Right SYSDBA Server group No server group definied server Previous server Collect data Keep collected data for days Default measurement Yes 365 interval SE Created by admin Created when 2009 03 01 11 44 47 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 03 01 11 44 47 Measurement type Index Name Interval Active session 28 ANONYMOUS Active session 15 min All ceecinn KI ANNNYMNI IS Al ceccinn 15 min Figure 4 10 Network Discovery Results Oracle 9 To start collecting select from the Operations drop down menu Modify Equipment The following window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Parent site SERVER HEALTH v i
99. 573 2 3 Copyright 2000 2007 http www cygwin com lt Back Cancel Figure 2 1 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program Window 4 Click Next The Choose a Download Source window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se 8 oa Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Type DP x Choose Download Source CE Choose whether to install or download from the internet or install from files in local directory Install from Internet downloaded files will be kept for future re use Download Without Installing lt Back Cancel Figure 2 2 Choose a Download Source Window 5 Select Install from Local directory and click Next The Select Root Install Directory window is displayed Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Directory Select Root Install Directory E Select the directory where you want to install Cygwin Also choose a few installation parameters M Root Directory i Browse Install For Default Text File Type All Users RECOMMENDED Unix binary RECOMMENDED Cygwin will be available to all users of No line translation done all files opened the system NOTE This is required if in binary mode Files on disk will have you wish to run services like sshd etc LF line endings C Just Me DOS text Cygwin will only be available to the Line endings will be translated from unix current user Only sel
100. 81 Ferd EE 106 FS WINGOW EE EE EE atece aes EE EES 107 Server le EEE aE AAEE 108 StarQuality Schema Update Window rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 112 Setup MESSE ne E ee eee 112 Uninstalling the Oracle Hee eege 114 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solarts AANEREN 115 Login WINGOW seede an 119 Flash Player Message Window rnananannnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnannnnenananennnnnnenansnnnennnennnnannennnener 120 The StarQuality User Interface x c stessscissetetceateessxeserbsetehacd ndesewestdereceePebenseteasvevarehaeetenes 120 Example of Menus Submenu Panel and Browser in Measurementsl 122 Example of Operations pull down men EEN 126 Hierarchy Perle 126 Scrolling and Hiding the SubmenNuaauassassabeuntetepeiedndidevivhvdnm 127 NAVF NOT TA ae 127 Creating a New Site Server Group Selection rnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 133 Creating New Equipments from Template WiMAX EDD 136 Adding Equipment from an Input File suernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 137 Adding a New AlvariSTAR gt StarQuality Module 138 SERIES Data COMSCHON bet sten Geer eege dee 140 Data Collection E 141 Creating New Equipment AlvariSTAR anunnnnnnnnnnnvnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnen 143 Figures Eenelter unene nnen 144 Figure 4 9 Default Oracle Template gpuer iu retong dee ENEE ANERE omnibus 145 Figure 4 10 Network Discovery Results Oracle
101. 9 Installation Added Oracle patch installation StarQuality User Manual Document History Changed Item Description Date Introduction Added 4Motion ver 3 0 and BreezeMAX Extreme to the supported equipment list Deleted Deployment Scenarios Installation Revised structure Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy on page 126 Removed the Link option for Alarms and Measurements Network Discovery Added 4Motion and BreezeMAX Extreme information Modified Prerequisites Generally revised Reports Added 4Motion and BreezeMAX Extreme information Setting Alarm Thresholds Moved all syntax tables to Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Chapter 11 Device Specific Information New Chapter including information per device type Ver 3 0 June 2010 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Reformatted View group options into tables and added description to the Display Deleted functionality Ver 3 0 15 September 2010 Chapter 5 Chart Settings Mouse hover now displays firmware changes Chapter 9 Adding a New Server Additional step for importing devices from AlvariSTAR 4Motion Restructured section to include version management and separate sub sections for each supported version Deletion of multiple equipment New section Managing Equipment with New section Unsuccessful Measurements Equipment Configu
102. 90 1F RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 7 22 90 1F RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 7 22 90 1F SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 7 22 90 34 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 24 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 Figure 5 14 Measurements Search Results gt To use the Search results in Measurements I To display the found objects click view 2 If the results contain only measurements or charts to display them together click on the view all link A page containing the charts is displayed 3 To create a virtual equipment containing the displayed list of measurements or charts click Save as Virtual Equipment INFORMATION menu item This method can substitute the manual selection of measurements and charts under the Customization StarQuality User Manual Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Saving Items as Submenus 5 7 Saving Items as Submenus You can create a submenu item under the Measurements menu in order to have a shortcut to a selected item This may save navigation time and searching for data _ To create a submenu item I Click the equipment icon you want to create a shortcut to 2 From the Operations drop down men
103. 99th Percentile v2 5 4UN1 The uplink noise determines sector UL E 3 0M capacity In case of UL noise the far E35 A NE MIRAIN AUNE MSs cannot reach the BS with the l minimum power required by the BS receiver sensitivity thus UL noise serves as UL RF resource Number Of Connected SUs M 25M2 Number Of Connected SUs 4CS Number of SUs that have been E 30M connected to the BS for the whole 15 and minute interval proceeding the PMTM later file generation StarQuality User Manual Ee 306 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Retransmission Downlink M 25M2 DL Retransmission Total 4DRO Number of transactions with a certain eee iy ees E 30 DL Retransmission Zero Retransmission 4DR1 ee Si ee pr E 30M the downlink direction m DL Retransmission One Retransmission 4DR2 DL Retransmission Two Retransmissions 4DR3 DL Retransmission Three Retransmissions 4DRO DL Retransmission Four Retransmissions 4DR5 DL Retransmission Above Four Retransmissions 4DR6 Seen N A Seen HASEE For internal system use SINR Distribution Downlink BW 25M2 DLSINR Distribution SINR lt 3dB 4SD1 Percentages of CPEs per SINR range SS DL SINR Distribution 3dB lt SINR lt 9dB 4SD2 OPO Pee DL SINR Distribution 11dB lt SINR lt 13dB 4SD3 DL SINR Distribution 1
104. A list of all servers is displayed Running servers are colored green Not running servers are colored red Browser 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status 06 Server events 07 Collector load Server start stop status 16 items found Name Status Type Server group Host Login Direct 3 a Zi Figure 9 32 Server Status 2 Click either Start or Stop to change the status or Check to manually check and refresh the status 9 5 6 Viewing Server Events The application manager module or modules if the secondary application manager is also installed periodically performs different verifications in connection with the database and the machines running StarQuality You can view the results of these verifications and the log entries created when modules are started or stopped me gt To access the Event Server list From Settings select Servers gt Server Event The server events list is displayed StarQuality User Manual Browser Servers 4 01 Licences erver groups OG 1500 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status 06 Server events 07 Collector load Chapter 9 General Setting Options Viewing Collector Load Information EM e and measurement summary Server events Number Time Server Message Figure 9 33 Server Events Window 9 5 7 Viewing Collector Load Inf
105. AM 1 2 4D08 MCS Distribution 64QAM 2 3 4D09 MCS Distribution 64QAM 3 4 4D10 MCS Distribution 64QAM 5 6 4D11 MIR CIR Provisioned Bits per 3 0 MIR CIR Provisioned 4MC Maximum Information Rate Second Committed Information Rate MS Hand Over Count E 3 0 Successful Ho Attempts 4029 Counts the number handover E 3 0M Failed Ho Attempts 4030 stem DEPOT inane Cur E Hand Over Ratio E 30 Successful Ho Attempts Ratio 4014 Ratio calculation of KPIs mentioned E 3 0M Ho Attempts Ratio 4015 SSES B35 f Failed Ho Attempts Ratio 4016 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description MS Registration Count E 3 0 Successful Initial NE 4022 also 4NTm for ASN GW Number of failed successful initial network entry attempts E 3 0M Failed Initial NE 4023 also 4NTn for ASN GW j EE H 35 MS Registration Service Flows M 3 0 Created Service Flows Qty 4025 also 4NTp for ASN GW Number of created service flows Count during MS registration MS Registration Ratio H 3 0 Failed Initial NE Ratio 4003 Ratio of KPIs mentioned above Successful Initial NE Ratio 4002 Created Service Flows Qty Ratio 4005 M 3 0M Failed Initial NE Ratio 4003 E 3 5 Successful Initial NE Ratio 4002 Noise Floor Uplink dBM tone RW 2 5M2 UL Noise
106. ASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS StarQuality User Manual ES SE Important Notice Important Notice This manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license Information in this document is subject to change without notice Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publica
107. Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Descripton E MCS Downlink Bit Bin E 2 5M2 MCS Min 4SU4 Counts bit bin for each MS j it Bi transaction Min and max are EH VEME BEES calculated by BS Average is calculated MCS Avg 4SU6 by dividing by number of samples The above were changed to H 30 Spectral Efficiency Min 4SU4 Spectral Efficiency Downlink E 3 0M Spectral Efficiency Max 4SU5 Bit Bin m 35 Spectral Efficiency Avg 4SU6 MCS Min v2 5 4SUn MCS Max v2 5 4SU0 MCS Avg v2 5 4SUp Average Spectral Efficiency v2 5 4SU0 E 3 1 MCS Avg FFR Reuse 3 4SUm MCS Max FFR Reuse 3 HASUy MCS Min FFR Reuse 3 HASUV MS Burst Error Rate Ratio H 30 MS Drop Ratio 4SUg Ratio based on the HARQ bursts of SERGE RES E 3 0M MS Successful Transfer Ratio 4SUf EREECHEN MS Drop Ratio H4SUg MS Retransmission Ratio HASUh MS Burst Error Rate H 30 MS Dropped Bursts Qty HASUj Counts HARQ bursts of ACK dropped Downlink Uplink Count and total StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information MS KPIs Table 11 9 4Motion SU KPIs Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Descripton MS Burst Error Rate E 3 0M MS Successfully Transferred Bursts Qty HASUi Downlink Uplink Count MS Dropped Bursts Qty HASUj MS Retransmissions HASUk SINR Downlink Uplink dB E 2 5M2 SINR Avg 4SU3 Signal to Noise Rati
108. Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes INFO Oracle tablespace SQ DATA created QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user name SQ QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user password INFO Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes INFO Oracle user SQ created 2 7 2 7 Completeing the Installation I The installer generates the schematic maps and exits INFO Redrawing schematic maps INFO Installer ended bash 3 00 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Running StarQuality on Solaris on page 108 Configuration Parameters on page 109 StarQuality User Manual Se amp amp 2 8 2 8 1 2 8 1 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation on Linux Server with External Oracle Database on the Installation on Linux Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system This installation type involves configuration of the Linux kernel parameters and the installation of the following components M Oracle server Oracle client is not required M StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Configuring Kernel Parameters for Linux x86 I Edit the tcSysct conffile and reboot the system Kernel sysctl configuration file for Red Hat Linux
109. EASUREMENTS 01 Search Sub menus Figure 3 4 S gt Alarms Main Enst E Reports menu Settings Tabs View Display deleted Elements Items in Na 50 seus Regular Setups Browser ees E Figure 3 4 Example of Menus Submenu Panel and Browser in Measurements 3 3 1 Alarms The following items are displayed when selecting Alarms from the main menu Table 3 1 Alarms Item Description See also Items in the submenu panel Root root directory navigation startpoint chosen menu item if Public and private menu items for viewing the alarms under the defined Items in the Browser Time Span Selecting the time range to display alarms M from time date to time date E day week month year M real time view auto refresh view Viewing Alarms by Time Span on page 197 View menu group Selecting the display mode for the alarms Alarm Display Options on page 197 Filters menu group Filtering of the alarms to be displayed Filtering Alarms on page 201 StarQuality User Manual 3 3 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started Measurements Measurements The following items are displayed when selecting Measurements from the main menu Table 3 2 Measurements Item Description See also Items in the submen u panel Search Search for si
110. ES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT WARNING HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE QUESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Y n WARNING IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE THAT III WARNING IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE WARNING APPLICATION INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User To create the tablespaces the installer prompts for the following E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration and data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table M Name and password for its Oracle user INFO Checking Oracle schema INFO Getting the default tablespace directory QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ CONF QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace file C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_ CONF dbf QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ CONF this could take several minutes INFO Oracle tablespace SQ CONF created QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ DATA StarQuality User Manual Se E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQual
111. Export all data to XLS Exports the all the entries to an XLS file including entries which are not currently displayed Filter Filters entries by equipment name or measurement name The rules for special characters are the same as for search see Site and Equipment Configuration on page 233 Entries with underline serve as links and jump to the specific Slot 2 Air Link Occupation equipment measurement with the properly selected date and time interval 8 5 2 Setting the Report Range and Display While viewing the report results the calendar at the Browser is used for setting the time interval of the report The selected report view is displayed to the right of the calendar You can also set what type of reports to view and whether to display the date in a column _ To use the calendar 1 Click on the arrow buttons in the two top corners of the calendar to change the month Alternatively select a month and year using the drop down menus see Figure 8 19 2 To change the type of time interval click on the Day Week Month Year text links at the bottom 3 Select the actual time interval by clicking on one of the displayed days months or years INFORMATION b Time intervals starting in the future cannot be selected with the calendar StarQuality User Manual Se 8 222 Chapter 8 Reports 200 fr HO nm rwmitirisis 1 2 ME 5 6 7 8 a EE 12 13 14 15 16 17 88 E 220222 26 27 28 29 3 31
112. INFO Checking the Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db 1 INFO Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 seems to be OK INFO Checking Oracle version INFO Found Oracle version 10 INFO Detected 64 bit Oracle StarQuality User Manual D 8 O 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality QUESTION StarQuality OS user name starq INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO Found StarQuality in opt starquality Select user starq and group starq with directory opt starquality Checking the environment of starq Environment checking is done Searching for running StarQuality modules Oracle checking Detected Solaris x86 with 64 bit Oracle so using full connect string instead of TNS names QUESTION Oracle host name localhost QUESTION Oracle port 1721 QUESTION Oracle service name BWANMS QUESTION Oracle SID BWANMS QUESTION Oracle SYSTEM user password CONFIRM Confirm the password ERROR Password mismatch QUESTION Oracle SYSTEM user password CONFIRM Confirm the password INFO Attempting to tnsping localhost 1721 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the SID BWANMS INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the service name BWANMS INFO Successful INFO Oracle checking successful INFO Configuring user SSH parameters INFO
113. INFO Configuring user SSH parameters INFO Done INFO Saving previous StarQuality config files INFO Untar StarQuality INFO Copy the define wimax_brand sql to the sql directory 2 8 2 4 StarQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts for the following Operating system user name to be created Operating system group to be created Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality Profile file to be used M Type of StarQuality installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory then it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N StarQuality User Manual Se amp Ep 2 8 2 5 2 8 2 6 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality Apache Configuration If you are not installing a data collector the installer asks whether it should configure the Apache WEB server or you will configure it later This question is among the
114. INFO Perl was built with PerlIO INFO Checking perl threading INFO Perl threading enabled INFO Checking required packages INFO Package bash found INFO Package openssh found INFO Package grep found INFO Package tar found INFO Package gzip found INFO Package httpd found INFO Package sed found INFO Done StarQuality User Manual 2 9 2 2 2 9 2 3 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Checking required packages for the schematic map feature INFO Package libjpeg 32 bit found INFO Package freetype 32 bit found INFO Package libXpm 32 bit found INFO Package libXau 32 bit found INFO Package libXdmcp 32 bit found INFO Package 1libX11 32 bit found INFO Done INFO Checking the SELinux state INFO SELinux is disabled OK INFO Keep in mind that the SELinux must not be activated when StarQuality is running INFO Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality INFO Done INFO Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll do
115. Interface for bulk export of large amounts of data by selection of chosen NEs date range and KPIs M On demand reports Creation and generation of reports referring to data already existing in the database Refer to Working with On Demand Reports on page 213 StarQuality User Manual Se amp ES 205 8 2 8 2 1 Chapter 8 Reports Report Configuration Report Configuration The configuration of reports Settings gt Reports is available to admin users only The following configuration options are available Report variables Defining the variables used for reports Report views Creating reports by selecting variables Report definitions export Saving reports as xm files Report definitions import Introducing xml files into the reports database Scheduled reports Setting a schedule for report delivery Report generation consists of the following steps Defining the variables which are the building blocks of the reports Only measurements performed after defining them as variables will be available for the reports Refer to Section 8 2 1 Sorting the created variables in various combinations into report views Refer to Section 8 2 2 Defining Report Variables Reports are based on the system existing measurements To start defining report variables I From the Settings menu select Reports gt Report Variables The Report Variable Configuration starting page contains a table showing the active
116. Is KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description R3 CIR Throughput 3 0 R3 CIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NT8 Ratio is a calculation of average actual Oversubscription traffic rate over R3 in respect to total provisioned CIR in R3 MIR Throughput 3 0 R3 MIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NT7 Ratio is a calculation of average actual Oversubscription traffic rate over R3 in respect to total provisioned MIR in R3 Throughput Bits per Second 3 0 R3 Throughput 4NT6 Average total bytes transferred over R3 with the active period to show average rate over R3 R3 Total CIR Bits per Second 3 0 R3 Total CIR 4NTa Average over 15 min period based on aggregation of CIR from all served BSs R3 Total MIR Bits Per Second 3 0 R3 Total MIR 4NT9 Average over 15 min period based on aggregation of MIR from all served BSs R6 CIR Throughput 3 0 R6 CIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NTd Ratio is a calculation of average actual Oversubscription traffic rate over R6 in respect to total provisioned CIR in R6 MIR Throughput 3 0 R6 MIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NTc Ratio is a calculation of average actual Oversubscription traffic rate over R6 in respect to total provisioned MIR in R6 Throughput Bits per Second 3 0 R6 Throughput 4NTb Average total bytes transferred over R3 with the active period to show average rate over R6 R6 Total CIR Bits per Secon
117. LY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT WARNING HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE QUESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Y n WARNING IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE THAT III WARNING IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE WARNING APPLICATION StarQuality User Manual Sei amp 67 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User The installer prompts for the following and creates the tablespaces E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration and data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table HM Name and password for its Oracle user INFO Checking Oracle schema INFO Getting the default tablespace directory QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ CONF QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace file export home oracle oradata SQ SQ CONF dbf QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ CONF this could take several minutes INFO Oracle tablespace SQ CONF created QUESTION Sta
118. MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4D01 Throughput of each MCS for the VEER E 3 0 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 4D02 Geh E 3 0M m MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 4D03 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 4D04 MCS Distribution QPSK 3 4 4D05 MCS Distribution 16QAM 1 2 4D06 MCS Distribution 16QAM 3 4 4D07 MCS Distribution 64QAM 1 2 4D08 MCS Distribution 64QAM 2 3 4D09 MCS Distribution 64QAM 3 4 4D10 MCS Distribution 64QAM 5 6 4D11 MCS Distribution Downlink BR 3 0M MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 MIMO B 4D12 ee M35 MCS Distribution QPSK 3 4 MIMO B 4D13 one MCS Distribution 16QAM 1 2 MIMO B 4D14 MCS Distribution 16QAM 3 4 MIMO B 4D15 MCS Distribution 64QAM 1 2 MIMO B 4D16 MCS Distribution 64QAM 2 3 MIMO B 4D17 MCS Distribution 64QAM 3 4 MIMO B 4D18 MCS Distribution 64QAM 5 6 MIMO B 4D19 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued 4Motion BTS KPls KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description MCS Distribution Uplink Bits E 25M2 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4D01 Throughput of each MCS for the er Second SE link direction P BR 3 0 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 4D02 E ianee E 3 0M MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 4D03 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 4D04 MCS Distribution QPSK 3 4 4D05 MCS Distribution 16QAM 1 2 4D06 MCS Distribution 16QAM 3 4 4D07 MCS Distribution 64Q
119. Motion collectors INFORMATION Only 4Motion version 2 5 is enabled by default in StarQuality You must enable SW versions 3 0 3 0M and 3 5 manually using the procedure described above If a device A is going to be upgraded you must enable the new version in StarQuality first Always check the 4Motion versions enabled in StarQuality before upgrading a 4Motion device 11 5 3 1 4Motion Version Compatibility This StarQuality version supports the 4Motion versions 2 5M 3 0 3 0M 3 1 and 3 5 The 4Motion NPU firmware versions supported for all BTS types Macro Indoor Macro Outdoor and Micro Outdoor are 2 5 212 7 2 5M1 3 0 5 14 to 3 0 5 16 3 0 3 0 10 3 3 0M and 3 5 Refer to the release notes for details about each version The Collector type is WiMAX 4Motion Default Built in Reports BottomN Uptime TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Average Sector Throughput TopN Number of Connected SUs StarQuality User Manual Q amp Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management 11 5 3 2 KPIs Per Firmware Version The following table shows the 4Motion KPIs and their presence in each of the SW firmware versions Y Yes N No Some of the KPIs have been changed throughout the versions These changes are described in the Comments column Table 11 6 Motion KPIs Per Firmware Version KPI Name in StarQuality 2 5M2 3 0 3 0M 3 5 Comments BS KPIs 1 MCS Distribut
120. N 297 Table 11 7 MONO BTS KPIS svevende 301 Table 11 8 4Motion ASN GW KPIS ssssssssssssssnssssnsnrnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnen 312 Table 1179 4M tion SU KPIS Lee 314 Table 11 10 Extreme BTS KPIS ege e EAR 317 Table TR Extreme SU eeneg 319 StarQuality User Manual SE Figures Figures Figure 2 1 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program WindoWw xxxxwnnxxnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 15 Figure 2 2 Choose a Download Source Window NENNEN EEN 16 Figure 2 3 Select Root Install Directory Window EEN 16 Figure 2 4 Select Local Package Directory Window AEN 17 Figure 2 5 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State 17 Figure 2 6 Select Packages Window All Install rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnr 18 Figure 2 7 Select Packages Window Perl Version Ak 19 Figure 2 8 Cygwin Installation Process caisi cciecesecnsenntaccneseecstisaessnetsmanssdenetanecanansennnecenesaxenceeanensaness 19 Figure 2 9 Cygwin Installation Completion ENEE ENEE ENNER REENEN 20 Figure 2 10 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window wannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 21 Figure 2 11 Licence S FEN ee dE EE EE 21 F re 212 Choose Components a Anise leanne eee 22 Figure 2 137 Star Quality le Ce 22 Figure 2 14 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete AANEREN REENEN 23 Figure 2 15 Oracle Database Install eugsepteeee eeneg EENEG 2
121. N Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TFTP BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Air Link Occupation TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Throughput TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TopN Air Link Occupation TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables FDD TopN Throughput TopN Yes Measurements 10 Figure 8 3 Report View Configuration Window example To create a new report view 1 Click add new The Report view configuration window is displayed Report view configuration Name Name Type Topn v First hierarchy level Equipments Se Result window OK Cancel Figure 8 4 Creating a New Report View 2 Set the following properties Enter a meaningful name free text 3 Select type TopN 4 Select the Bar Type Table only other options are not applicable 5 Select if to add a column with dates 6 Leave the Top Level check box selected StarQuality User Manual amp O 8 Co Chapter 8 Reports Defining Report Views 7 Se
122. O REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD StarQuality User Manual ES SE vi Legal Rights Disclaimer a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL
123. Operating System updates The StarQuality application requires a minimum of 20 GB free storage space A valid StarQuality license required for initial activation after installation On windows the installation should be done by a local user with administrator rights preferably administrator user 2 1 3 HW SW and Disk Allocation Requirements The following table lists the requirements for hardware software and disk space depending on the equipment capacity and operating system StarQuality User Manual Ge amp Q Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Table 2 2 Requirements Based on Capacity HW SW and Disk Allocation Requirements Maximum Capacity Operating Systems HW Requirements for Each Server Disk Allocation 1 50 BTSs 2 1000 CPEs 3 5 concurrent clients Windows 2003 64Bit customer upgraded OR Windows 2008 64Bit Standard Edition English OR RedHat 5 Linux x86_32 Enterprise English requires PAE kernel package for more than 4 GB RAM support 1 1 x Intel Core i7 950 at 3 06 GHz or higher 2 8 GB RAM 3 4x HDD SAS 150 GB 15000 RPM 1 1 x 150 GB OS StarQuality Oracle 2 1x 150 GB StarQuality Oracle Tablespace 3 1x 150 GB Oracle Redo Log Undo Tablespace 1 200 BTSs 2 10 000 CPEs 3 20 concurrent clients Windows 2008 R2 64Bit Standard Edition English OR RedHat 5 Linux x86_32 Enterprise English requires PAE kernel package for more than 4 GB RAM sup
124. Order Variable name Name Subname Field Div with Precision Weekly Monthly Annual aggregation Weekly Monthly Annual aggregation postfi Column link Cell link Over Below Description Report view configuration EI FDD SNMP Occupation Y FOD SNMP Occupation InMax Is null EN ki average ml None z None E Maximum of the values for first formula OK Cancel Figure 8 6 Adding a New Variable 15 Repeat for each variable Defining Report Views DX a Set the order Assign the same order to variables you want to group Grouped variables share variable name and name they differ by subname b Select a variable name from the drop down list of your pre defined variables See To create a report variable on page 207 C Enter a meaningful name for the order group INFORMATION If applicable the name should specify if the measurement is an uplink or downlink value d Enter a meaningful subname for the sub column it is only visible on the report if there are at least two grouped columns Example of grouping according to steps a d Common Measurement name Utilization OG Common Name Utilization Downlink OG Subname Min for one variable Max for the other e From the Field drop down list select the required field value Make sure that the field matches the names given above StarQuality User Manual Chapter 8 Reports Defining
125. PT lt INPUT3 and VAR3 OUPT gt O 1 1 4 Expression Validate ariable1 SNMP Uptime lt INPUT1 and Variable1 SNMP Uptime gt 0 1x in 1 sample and Yalidate not variable2 SNMP Uptime lt INPUT2 and Variable2 SNMP Uptime gt 0 1x in 1 sample xor variable3 SNMP Uptime lt INPUT3 and Variable3 SNMP Uptime gt 0 1x in 1 sample Figure 6 3 Expression Containing Multiple Variables When using multiple variables their names should be differentiated var1 var2 etc Also all the variables must belong to the same equipment Alternatively you can create the template without expression and later edit the threshold locally using input field See detailed information in Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 191 4 Click Validate If the syntax is red fix it according to the above Note that if the validation does not succeed the system does not pinpoint the exact source of the problem 5 Click OK A new threshold template is added to the system INFORMATION If you set the threshold template for automatic activation an additional management button now is displayed for its entry Refer to Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates on page 182 StarQuality User Manual Se amp ES Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates 6 3 Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates As mentioned before a threshold template can be
126. Report Views INFORMATION e If applicable First formula always represents uplink Second formula represents downlink f Leave Div with is null Leave the Precision value at 0 g Set Weekly monthly aggregation according to the value selected in the Field Enter the Weekly monthly yearly summary postfix The application appends this text to the name of the column if the field is specified and it is not a daily report i Leave all the next fields unedited j Click OK The Report View Configuration page is displayed 16 In the upper right side of the page select the report order using the Order by Column drop down list 17 Click Back in the upper right corner to save changes and return to the report view list 18 To view the report see Viewing Reports on page 221 To edit an existing report view I From Settings select Reports gt Report Views N Click tables next to the report view you want to edit 3 In the upper section select the hierarchy level Additional Measurements D Click add new edit or delete gt To create a new report view based on an existing view I Click copy from a setting page is displayed see Figure 8 7 Report view configuration Name Copy from FDD SNMP Occupation _ OK Cancel Figure 8 7 Creating a New Report View Using the Copy From Option StarQuality User Manual Se Des 212 Chapter 8 Reports Working with On Dema
127. S vekke 38 StarQuality Setup Wizard WINdow uunemnusnsi viet 39 Licence Agreem E 39 CHOOSE COMPONENP E 40 ele De Installing EE 40 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnr 41 Oracle Database Configuration 10g Option EEN 42 Oracle Database Configuration External Oracle Option 42 StarQuality Windows Service Registration ENEE 43 jer NERE Jo gt EE EE EE EEE EE RE 44 Oracle Connection Parameters Luvnvssdeqsnkkedeertdnkunaeiddktjoiiniin 44 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parametere ken 46 Oracle Connection User Parameters RENE ENEE 46 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation axrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnr 47 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program Window rraxxxnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnr 51 Choose Download Source WINdom sicissseccecsaccedesaceccancszetecnctrenxanstibicnsiecaxansdenrisenanen 52 Select Root Install Directory Window ENEE RENE REENEN 52 Select Local Package Directory Window nanunnanunnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnananavennannnnnnnnnvnvnnnnnnnenener 53 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State 53 Select Packages Window gt All Install sou Gereieeegeg eeEuu eege Eege geren 54 Select Packages Window Perl Version ENEE ENEE ENEE 55 Cygwin Installation e 55 Cygwin Installation Completion s ssssssssssssssusrnnnnnnnsnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna 56 StarQuality Setup Wizard VWumd
128. S_1 amp par1 S_ Object with date and time view http 10 10 144 1 cgi bin link pl view MM amp obj E_1001 amp ro0t S_i amp pari S Object with every view settings http 10 10 144 1 cgi bin link pl viev MM amp 0bj E 1001 amp root 5 1 amp parl S Back Figure 5 8 Show Links E Goto Alarms jumps to the Alarms main menu items while keeping the selected hierarchy item M Logical BS History for 4Motion only Displays the BSs to which the a CPE SU has been connected during mobility within the measured time see Figure 5 9 ROOT Bel O0T gt 4Motion regular setups gt roee SUs gt BS 1 2 3 gt SU 00 10 7 0A 77 65 Operation TE Link Logical BS history SU MAC From Site ID From BS ID To Site ID To BS ID Date SU 00 10 7 0A 77 65 5454 BS 1 2 3 2009 08 13 01 52 49 SU 00 10 E7 0A 77 65 5454 BS 1 2 3 2009 08 13 13 30 12 SU 00 10 E7 0A 77 65 5454 BS 1 2 3 2009 08 13 21 52 51 Back Figure 5 9 Logical BS History Window M Go to Configuration jumps to the Settings gt Site and System Configuration page M Save as submenu adds a submenu item at the top panel see Saving Items as Submenus on page 170 StarQuality User Manual Ge O oa Q 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Viewing Measurement Data Viewing Measurement Data After reaching the equipment level using one of the navigation methods described above th
129. U usage gt x ARDE AN Variable 1 SNMP CPU usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample edit del Host disc usage gt x Semi Sn No Variable 1 SNMP Disc capacity usage Table gt INPUT 1 1x in 1 sample edit del Host memory usage gt x Sr No Variable 1 SNMP Memory usage Table gt INPUT 1 ix in 1 sample edit del Host virtual memory usage gt x Sa No Variable 1 SNMP Virtual memory usage Table gt INPUT 1 1x in 1 sample Teditl dell Interface error gt x EE See are ar eee Eee eee ee to hl al D Figure 6 1 Threshold Template Configuration Template List StarQuality User Manual Ge Se 8 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates 2 Do one of the following Click add new The Threshold Configuration editor displays an empty template table Click edit The Threshold Configuration editor displays the template table with information Threshold template configuration Threshold name Measurements within E the same equipment Measurements with KE the same description Expression KI e Validate Validate Level L None DN Type None v E mail J first SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert Cl Automatically applied rrr below site ROGI Equipment name like Equipment name not like Cancel Figure
130. UESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Y n WARNING IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE THAT III WARNING IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE WARNING APPLICATION INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User The installer prompts for the following and creates the tablespaces E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration and data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table E Name and password for its Oracle user INFO Checking Oracle schema INFO Getting the default tablespace directory QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ CONF QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace file C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_ CONF dbf QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ CONF this could take several minutes INFO Oracle tablespace SQ CONF created QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ DATA StarQuality User Manual Se amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace file IC ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ DATA dbf QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M INFO
131. User Manual amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 8 Click on the word Default in the main All entry package see Figure 2 6 and change it to Install Cygwin Setup Select Packages DS Select Packages a Select packages to install C Keep C Prev Cum C Exp View Category Caso New 18 See Package S S EI All 4 Install Admin 43 Install Audio 4 Install Base 4 Install Database 4 Install Devel amp Install Doc 4 Install Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install vw Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 50 Select Packages Window All Install 9 Verify that all the entries under the All main package have also been changed to Install If not change them 10 Scroll down to the Perl package and expand it by clicking on the sign 11 Check the sub package under Perl If it is different than 5 8 x x e g skip click on it to change it to the required 5 8 x X INFORMATION The Perl version must be 5 8 x x otherwise it does not meet the StarQuality requirements If you have a different Perl version use a different cygwin installation package StarQuality User Manual Se De Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Select Packages ls Ea Select Packages Select packages to install E C Keep C Prey Ze Cure C Exp View Category
132. User Manual D amp O Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality QUESTION StarQuality OS user name starq INFO Found StarQuality in opt starquality INFO Select user starq and group starq with directory opt starquality INFO Checking the environment of starq INFO Environment checking is done INFO Searching for running StarQuality modules INFO Oracle checking INFO Detected Solaris x86 with 64 bit Oracle so using full connect string instead of TNS names QUESTION Oracle host name localhost QUESTION Oracle port 1721 QUESTION Oracle service name BWANMS QUESTION Oracle SID BWANMS QUESTION Oracle SYSTEM user password CONFIRM Confirm the password ERROR Password mismatch QUESTION Oracle SYSTEM user password CONFIRM Confirm the password INFO Attempting to tnsping localhost 1721 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the SID BWANMS INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the service name BWANMS INFO Successful INFO Oracle checking successful INFO Configuring user SSH parameters INFO Done 2 7 2 4 StarQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts for the following M Operating system user name to be created M Operating system group to be created StarQuality User Manual Se SES 2 7 2 5 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation
133. Using the Bulk Export Wizard 3 Select a time frame using the input fields or the calendar button Specify maximum one week Longer type results in an error message when trying to proceed to the next stage INFORMATION Seconds are ignored minutes are regarded as the closest quarter of an hour 4 Select NE Type BTS and any technology required 5 Click BTS Selection in the path at the top of the work area see Figure 8 20 The filtering criteria screen is displayed Bulk export wizard a Basic parameters gt BTS selection Site name 4Motion BTS name Ir BTS address 10 10 Site ID GGi 100 O Site name BTS name E BTS address V Steps S r Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 Figure 8 21 Bulk Export Wizard Filtering Devices 6 Enter the following criteria All categories are optional That is if left empty no filtering is performed Also all input is according to the search rules described in Searching Measurements on page 167 Site name BTS name BTS Address IP Site ID as exists in the database 7 Click OK A list of network elements matching the filter criteria is displayed You can repeat the filtering until getting the desired results 8 Select the check boxes of BTSs you wish to export data from or use the topmost check box to select all the elements StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 225 Chapter 8 Reports Using the Bulk Export Wizard
134. Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc apache httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc apache httpd conf 20090512 122852 from etc apache httpd conf INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc apache httpd conf INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server then the installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server is running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after StarQuality User Manual Se Eo 2 6 2 6 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER Y
135. ache INFO Creating a new etc apache httpd conf INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server then the installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server is running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the StarQuality User Manual Se G 2 7 2 6 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT WARNING HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE Q
136. acle database StarQuality User Manual D amp O Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality elief in addition to all other remedies that may be available in law at y or otherwise If you have any questions concerning this Agreement please contact us at www alvarion com ATT Legal Department E mail legal alvarion com i Do you agree to the licence terms lt Y N gt 1 The perl usr bin perl is the same as the usr local bin perl The OS user of Oracle oracle Oracle user oracle doesn t exist Do you want to install Oracle lt Y N gt N y Embeded Oracle install supported Please specify Oracle 1 installer directory The directory have to contains both setup and patch install_directory 182 1 database solx86 b4 database runInstaller p68108189 19284 Solaris86 64 Diski runInstaller tmp sq2 5 Setup db export home downloads sq2 5 Setup db Please specifie Oracle home directory export home oracle l ora config file tmp starquality scripts deploy oraparam properties StarQuality v2 5 4 en bin line 2639 tmp starquality scripts deploy oraparam pPoperties var starquality oraparam properties No such file or directory INFO Oracle install configuration file tmp starquality scripts deploy or aparam properties Oracle install step USER ADD start Wednesday June 2 2010 12 32 1 LOGDIR tmp starquality log create group RC SUCCESS LOGDIR tmp starquality log oracle dir O
137. allation of the following components M Oracle server Oracle client is not required BW StarQuality The required steps are I Configure Kernel Parameters for Solaris x86 Section 2 6 1 1 2 Configure network ports Section 2 6 1 2 3 Install the Oracle server Section 2 6 1 3 4 Install StarQuality Section 2 6 2 5 Run StarQuality Section 2 10 3 Pre installation Tasks Configuring Kernel Parameters for Solaris x86 I Add the following entries to the etcSystem file and reboot the system set shmsys shminfo_shmmax 4294967295 set shmsys shminfo_shmmni 100 set semsys seminfo_semmni 100 set semsys seminfo semmsl 256 2 Verify that there is a minimum of 10 GB swap space Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 70 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 10 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed equipment 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE App server managed equipment and 162 SNMP Outbound towards other NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed equipment 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in 16162 SNMP order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound toward
138. alue are shown Limits Specify a condition value e g gt 10M and a sample time e g the last hour The following limit trendlines are available Limit counter The number of times the condition was true in the time sample is shown as a trendline Limit indicator A transparent red area is shown when at least one time the condition was true in the time sample Limit sum The sum of the measurement values based on the same time interval StarQuality User Manual Se S Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Setting Trendlines to Graphs Average and deviation three trend lines are displayed showing the average of the element as well the plus and minus deviation The following trendlines are available 0 Average and one deviation 0 Average and two deviations Average and three deviations The following figure shows a few examples of setting trendlines StarQuality User Manual Se amp D 172 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements 10 117 4 51 BS 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughput Setting Trendlines to Graphs Export to XL show details Linear trendline 2010 06 01 00 2010 05 16 12 2010 05 24 06 7 000 000 500000 5 8 3 3000 000 5 2 1000000 D 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 lt Wt maan DL Total E pe mmo B DL Total Trend Ml DL MMO Aer 10 117 4 51 BS 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughput Export to XLS show details
139. an view this history log and either go back to a previous entry by clicking on the view link or open it in a new tab by right clicking on the view link ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs gt BS 255 243 41 22 22 222 gt SU 00 12 CF 89 61 DE Operation Se Show history Back Menu Submenu Object Time view Measurements ROOT ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs gt BS 255 243 41 22 22 222 von view Measurements ROOT ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs Gene view Measurements ROOT ROOT gt Regular Setups ng Realtime view Measurements ROOT ROOT view Back Figure 5 7 Show History M Show links Displays three links which jump directly to the currently viewed object when a new browser window is opened The difference between the three links are the level of settings stored in them Object only stores only the location of the object itself Object with date and time stores the selected date and time interval or the real time display state Object with every setting stores every setting made in the Browser area StarQuality User Manual Se 8 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Operations Drop Down Menu Options ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs gt BS 255 243 41 22 22 222 gt SU 00 12 CF 89 61 DE Operation Se Show links Back Name Link Object only view http 10 10 144 1 cgi bin link pl viev MM amp obj E_1001 amp root
140. arQuality User Manual Ke Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management M swIMAX 16E VERSIONS 30 0 For 4Motion 3 0 default value 0 M SWIMAX_16E VERSIONS 3010 1 For 4Motion 3 0M default value 0 E swIMAX 16E VERSIONS 35 1 For 4Motion 3 5 default value 0 M sWIMAX_16E VERSIONS 3030 0 E WIMAX 16E VERSIONS 31 0 NOTE E e Follow the steps below in their exact order For all the charts and measurements to display properly you must enable the corresponding software version in StarQuality H before the unit is discovered To setup the desired 4Motion versions I Stop every 4Motion collector 2 Goto optStarquality et and open the CONFIG_ N pm file In the CONFIG_ N pm file set the corresponding WIMAX 4Motion VERSIONS parameters to 1 for enabling the version or to 0 for disabling it For instance to enable versions 2 5 and 3 0M and disable versions 3 0 and 3 5 the following values apply SWIMAX 16 SWIMAX 16 SWIMAX 16 SWIMAX 16 E VERSIONS 25 1 E VERSIONS 30 0 E VERSIONS 3010 1 E VERSIONS 35 0 3 Goto optstarquality bin and run the arop wimax 4Motion charts plscript file cd opt starquality bin drop wimax 4Motion charts pl StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management INFORMATION j If you are running StarQuality on Solaris it must be run as starq user su starq 4 Start the 4
141. ariable on the correct StarQuality machine TNS The Transparent Network The TNS name appears in the tnsnames ora file on the StarQuality machine Host and port IP of the Oracle database server and the port used for connecting to it The default port is 1521 Service name Service name of Oracle server client If this value is defined do not fill in SID For internal Oracle SQ SID Service ID in case service ID is defined in Oracle server client If this value is defined do not fill in Service name System password and Confirm password The password of the SYSTEM user in the database For internal Oracle oracle 10 Click Next The Oracle Connection Tablespace parameters are displayed Point both CONF and DATA tablespaces to the Oracle data computer partition according to Table 2 2 Disk Allocation StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 11 Review the creation details of CONF and DATA tablespaces M starQuality Setup Plet E Conf tablespace 5Q CONF File CHORACLEIPRODUCT 10 2 D ORADATALORCLI5Q CONF dbf Size 300M Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle tablespace parameters Data tablespace 5Q DATA File CJORACLEIPRODUCT 10 2 OJORADATAJORCLISQ DATA dbf Size 10000M Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 61 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameters 12 Click Nex
142. arning L Variable WIMAX FDD TFTP Seen Table 0 1x in 1 sample seen edit den Host CPU usage gt x ee No Variable 1 SNMP CPU usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample edit del Host disc usage gt x ee No Variable 1 SNMP Disc capacity usage Table gt INPUT 1 1xin 1 sample edit del Host memory usage gt x EEE Variable 1 SNMP Memory usage Table gt INPUT1 1xin 1 sample edit del Host virtual memory usage gt x gren ae Variable1 SNMP Virtual memory usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample eege Figure 9 26 Setting Templates Window Chapter 9 General Setting Options Server Configuration and Management Admin only 9 5 Server Configuration and Management Admin only In the Servers menu item you can manage users licences servers discovery and configuration and collection parameters The following settings are available from the browser Licence Configuration on page 256 Device and Measurement Summary on page 258 Server Configuration on page 259 Start Stop Status of Servers on page 263 Viewing Server Events on page 264 Viewing Collector Load Information on page 265 NOTE e Some of the items in the browser are not applicable therefore are not described 9 5 1 Overview Server configuration and management refers to two server types Default server e g the application manager or the repor
143. arranty a Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed under normal use and conditions will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen 14 months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser the Warranty Period Alvarion will at its sole option and as Purchaser s sole remedy repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion standard R amp R procedure b With respect to the Firmware Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS T
144. asured values Parent name view 10 0 22 252 Measurement name First value Second value Slot 2 Air Link Occupation Back Figure 7 3 Detailed Alarm Information StarQuality User Manual F 7 2 1 7 28 7 2 2 1 Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms The browser at the left hand side of the user interface under the main menu is used to filter and arrange the alarms There are three groups in the Browser each controls the display of alarms The individual groups can be expanded or collapsed and by clicking on the button on the left edge next to them which can be useful since this panel has no scroll bar A too tio is also displayed if the mouse pointer is moved above the group icon Filtering of alarms can only be set with these groups if a set of alarms is already selected on the top part of the screen The following sections explain in details the individual groups Viewing Alarms by Time Span You can define the time span of alarms to be displayed The following view options are available in this group Table 7 2 Time Span Options Icon Tooltip Description Realtime view The currently active alarms are displayed D Historical view by date A calendar is displayed Select the desired day week month and ikad year to display alarms during that time Historical view by time Specify the time in
145. atabase connection from the StarQuality machine must be available To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sq p us utility as follows a Switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user b Enter the following command sqlplus system oracleetestme assuming that the database SID is testme and the system password is oracle If the SQL prompt is displayed connectivity to the database server is confirmed Report any error message the database administrator c Enter exit Windows or quit Solaris to complete the procedure StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks M The following Oracle database information must be available when installing StarQuality Service name or Service ID TNS Transparent Network Substrate Password for SYSTEM user 2 3 1 3 Installing Cygwin Cygwin is a UNIX like environment for Windows Always use the cygwin application to run StarQuality commands You can download the Cygwin Installation files from the Alvarion FTP Server or from the internet ke To install Cygwin I Download Cygwin files From the internet Make sure the Cygwin version you download includes the following packages Sapache base files base passwd bash binutils bzip2 coreutils crypt cygrunsrv cygutils cygwin editrights expat findutils gawk gcc core gcc g gcc m
146. ate Machine on page 48 Installation on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database on page 63 Installation on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 70 Installation on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine on page 78 Installation on Linux Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 86 Installation on Linux Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine on page 96 Running StarQuality on page 105 StarQuality Upgrade on page 111 Uninstalling StarQuality on page 114 Installation Troubleshooting on page 116 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Introduction 2 1 Introduction 2 1 1 Installation Types StarQuality can be installed on systems machines running Windows or UNIX like operating systems with internal or external databases This chapter is divided into sections according to the type of operating system and type of database installation Following are the possible StarQuality installation configurations M Installation on Windows with internal Oracle Database with external Oracle Database on the same machine with Oracle Database on a separate machine M installation on Solaris with internal Oracle Database with external Oracle Database on the same machine with Oracle Database on a separate machine M installation on Linux with external Oracle Database on the same machi
147. ated Bits per Second CIR Allocated eBSe Aggregation of maximum provisioned traffic of CIR services during the sampled 15 minutes period CIR Related Over Subscription Ratio CIR related Over Subscription Ratio eBSg Calculation of average actual traffic in respect to total provisioned CIR in StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Extreme BTS KPIs Table 11 10 Extreme BTS KPls Continued KPI Measurement Name Code for Description Threshold and API Drop Ratio Drop Ratio eBSb Ratio between number of dropped bursts and total bursts dropped and succeeded counted in the sampled period MIR Allocated Bits per Second MIR Allocated eBSf Aggregation of maximum provisioned traffic of MIR services during the 15 minutes period MIR Related Over Subscription Ratio MIR related Over Subscription Ratio eBSh Calculation of average actual traffic in relation to total provisioned MIR in Number of Connected SU Count Number Of Connected SUs eCS Number of SUs that have been connected to the BS for the whole 15 minute interval proceeding the PMTM file generation Repetition Ratio Repetition Ratio eBSc Ratio between aggregated CPE HARQ repetitions to aggregated Total Bursts Seen eSEE Throughput Bits per Second Throughput eT Average sector throughput per BS each measurement represents the average throughput of the passed sa
148. ation 2 11 1 StarQuality Upgrade on Windows To upgrade StarQuality Windows I Perform Stop Services as follows a On the desktop right click My Computer and select Manage b Select Services and Applications gt Services C Right click on StarQuality Service and select Stop 2 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed 3 Follow the installation instructions on the screen The wizard runs as in the regular installation procedure until it reaches the StarQuality Schema Update window which indicates that this is an upgrade Click Next StarQuality User Manual Se D Q Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation StarQuality Upgrade on Solaris M starquality Setup LU i StarQuality schema update The StarQuality schema needs to be updated Click on the Next button to run the update Result of the update script checking Update scripts are needed update_20090105 sql update_20090130 sql update_20090211 sql update_20090223_wimax sql update_20090325 sql Nullsoft Install System v2 42 Cancel Figure 2 71 StarQuality Schema Update Window M StarQuality Setup xi A Running the update scripts this could take several minutes Figure 2 72 Setup Message 4 Click OK to the Setup message and wait for the installation to complete Click Finish 5 Proceed as in regular installation M Load a new licence that matches the new version see To load a licence
149. by parent E Yes restrict your search to equipment that has the parent attribute attribute enabled The system finds those objects whose parent name meets the conditions E No disregard the parent attribute Field Select a variable by which to filter your results Search Type in a value that must apply to the field you selected You can use and to replace a single character or a string of characters Without Type in characters to be ignored by the system You can use and characters to replace a single character or a string of characters Type Always choose Equipment Results count Limits the maximum number of results 10 to 500 3 Click OK The results are displayed as well as the searching string as it would appear at simple search StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS Chapter 4 Network Discovery In this chapter M Overview on page 132 M Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 135 M Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site on page 142 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Overview 4 1 Overview At first login the system contains only a ROOT site You build your new network sites under the ROOT to be able to start monitoring your equipment performance using the StarQuality Mapping the network in StarQuality can be done using various structures such as by geographical locations by topics etc This section explains the creation of aa WiMAX network and all
150. bytes N A FSUh Ver 3 8 only N A SU Transferred Bytes bytes N A FSUb Ver 3 8 only N A 11 3 3 3 Common BTS KPIs Uptime 11 3 4 Default Built in Reports E BottomN Uptime M TopN Air Link Utilization HM TopN Throughput D TopN Number of Connected SUs StarQuality User Manual Ces Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information BreezeACCESS VL 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL 11 4 1 Overview SW Compatibility Version 6 0 Up to 10 SUs per BTS can be measured Collector type WiMAX VL 11 4 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites StarQuality registered as Authorised Manager Traps disabled PM TM Collection Activated StarQuality User Manual Ke GC Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 4 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 4 3 1 BS KPIs Table 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic KPIs KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Concatenated Frames Received frames per second Concatenated Frames Single VCFS The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames There are also separate Concatenated Frames More VCFM counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More Concatenated Frames Double VCFD Concatenated Frames Total VCFT Concatenated Frames Transmitted frames per second The total number of con
151. catenated frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More StarQuality User Manual Ee Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic KPIs Continued KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Errors Received frames per second Errors Receive CRC HVERC E Phy The number of Physical errors unidentified signals Errors Receive Decrypt VERD E CRC The number of frames received from Errors Receive Duplicate frames discarded VERd the wireless medium containing CRC errors Errore Receive Oth r HVERO Overrun The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded Errors Receive Overrun HVERO the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port EES E Decrypt The number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism M Other Errors other than previous KPIs M Duplicate Frames Discarded The number of data frames discarded because multiple copies were received If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be received more than once Although duplicate frames are included in all KPIs that include data
152. cedure The following Oracle database information should be available when installing StarQuality Oracle Database server IP Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM use 2 9 2 Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Linux x86 operating system using the command line installer All operations should be done while logged in as root user mo To install StarQuality Linux 1 Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP StarQuality User Manual amp amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation 2 Follow the next sections for installation details 2 9 2 1 Basic Checks The installer checks the following details E Version of the operating system M Required packages M Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary Installing StarQuality If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation INFO Command line parameters INFO Installer started INFO LOG file tmp starquality install log INFO Checking perl version INFO Found perl usr local bin perl INFO Checking OS type INFO Found Red Hat 5 INFO OS Linux x86 INFO Checking perl 32 64bit INFO Checking perl PerlIO
153. change your selection click Prev at the upper right of the screen to return to the previous step To continue click Activate data collection or Delete depending on your previous selection to finalize the process 9 2 3 4 Merging Sector Data Following Sector Name Change When sector names are changed in a BTS the system recognize them as new and they are added to the BTS The measurements results start from the date of the change while the previous sector names remain within the scope of the BTS with results only up to the name change date StarQuality User Manual Se amp De 243 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations StarQuality enables to combine these old and new sector results and delete the old results so that the final state is the updated BTS configuration with all the sectors having continuous results across the name change phase A sector BS AU appears in the results of searching Inactive sector merge if the alarm for the BS or AU Not Seen threshold was raised more than a day before the search To merge delete an inactive sector I Select Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration gt Inactive sector merge The Inactive sector merge window is displayed gt Browser Site and equipment confi 4 01 Site and equipment configuration 02 Scheduled configuration Inactive sector merge 03 Bulk measurement discovery 04 Bulk deletion I Equipment name Description
154. chine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 48 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 7 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed equipment 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE App server managed equipment and 162 SNMP Outbound towards other NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed equipment 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client server As installed From StarQuality to Oracle Default and from Oracle to 1521 StarQuality Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in 16162 SNMP order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server 2 4 1 2 Installing Oracle Follow these guidelines HM Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server Client versions M install the Oracle Server on a standalone Oracle machine according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes M Install Oracle client using the Administrator type installation M When completing the Oracle client installation use the Oracle Net Configuration Assistant to create a connection to the Database server and test it M During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQua
155. configured for automatic assignment for newly discovered NEs either CPEs or BTSs The new NE introduced into the network will be assigned the automatically activated threshold template If the Automatically applied below site option is defined when creating or editing the threshold template the mechanism is activated To activate automatic template assignment There are two ways of operation M Automatic mode Once every 4 hours first time is 4 hours after the threshold template saving the system searches for NEs matching the threshold template which do not implement it If any such NEs are found the template is applied to them M Manual mode Click now next to the threshold entry to trigger the same search for NEs as described above See also Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments on page 185 StarQuality User Manual Se D amp Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates 6 4 Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates You can export threshold templates as xm files and import reports to from another StarQuality system or for backup The following fields of the threshold template are imported exported depending on their setting in the source and destination systems M When since this is a pointer to an exclusion window template time frames in which thresholds can be activated deactivated StarQuality will abort the import if the selected exclusion window name
156. cription I ig Jue z 9 kalas lia liali H KE 1 TDD Ms s 785 11 12 13 ig 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 Neek Month Year Figure 7 6 Detailed View of Alarms In each of these views navigate to a site by clicking on its icon The contained sites and equipment are displayed in a similar view Tracking the hierarchy downwards you can reach the equipment causing the alarm and then by clicking on the icon of this equipment the name of the violated threshold and the chart of the referenced measurement values are displayed On this lowest level you can also choose a threshold that is currently not violated in order to check the settings of the threshold value If the alarm is not threshold but event based StarQuality displays the time of alarm on the chart with superimposed transparent red rectangles StarQuality User Manual Se Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Alarm Display Options Threshold Slot 1 Occupation gt 25 Weekly 30 min Export to XLS 40 00 36 00 30 00 26 00 20 00 15 00 Sep26 Sep27 Sep27 Sep28 Sep28 Sep20 Sep29 Sep30 Sep30 OctO1 Oct01 OctO2 OctO2 OctO3 OctO3 Oct04 OctO4 OctO5 Oct 05 2008 09 26 03 30 2008 10 05 11 30 MM Uplink mae 39 91 avg 31 49 min 23 70 last 34 67 ll Downlink max 17 61 avg 15 91 mine 12 81 last 16 87 Monthly 2 hour Export to XLS View Measurement Figure 7 7 The Equipment Level View
157. d Active Idle MSs out of E 30 Active MS Ratio 4033 Ratio of values measured above registered StarQuality User Manual CH Eed Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Air Link Utilization B 25M2 Air Link Utilization ALL 4UA The utilization of available wireless link D ilization f Il E 3 0M UL Air Link Utilization Data Zone 4UU1 ru a TER slots including MAP not including UL Air Link Utilization Feedback Zone v2 5 4UU2 preamble and TTG RTG per BS as a percentage of total slots available for DL Air Link Utilization Data Z 4UD1 Se E Ee the uplink and downlink directions DL Air Link Utilization First Zone 4UD2 E 3 0M DL Ar Link Utilization Reuse 3 Data Zone 4UD3 H 35 M Average Provisioned E 30 Average Provisioned BE MIR 4041 Counts the provisioned DL UL based Downlink bits per second istered MS d Th 8 1 BR 3 0M average Provisioned RT CIR 4037 Pee A aS RET ee M Average Provisioned Uplink m 35 graphs are per QoS The calculation bits per second Average Provisioned RT MIR 4038 divides the accumulated value with 900 seconds Average Provisioned UGS CIR 4034 Average Provisioned eRT CIR 4035 Average Provisioned eRT MIR 4036 Average Provisioned nRT CIR 4039 Average Provisioned nRT MIR 4040 BS Traffic Ty
158. d 3 0 R6 Total CIR HANTf Average over 15 min period based on aggregation of CIR from all served BSs StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 8 4Motion ASN GW KPIs Continued MS KPIs KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description R6 Total MIR Bits per Second 3 0 R6 Total MIR 4NTe Average over 15 min period based on aggregation of MIR from all served BSs Service Flow usage Ratio 3 0 Service Flow usage Ratio 4NTi The number of service flows in respect to maximum allowed of 36000 service flows Uptime All Uptime HAUPT NPU uptime 11 5 6 MS KPIs Table 11 9 4Motion SU KPIs KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Descripton Aggregated Throughput Bits H 30 Aggregated Throughput 4SUa Counts the bytes transferred and per Second E 30M calculates the transferred rate TER normalized to the active frames MS transferred data M RSSI Downlink dBm E 3 0M Downlink RSSI Avg 4SUA RSSI is sampled from each burst Min d Iculated by BS A m 35 Downlink RSSI Max ASUC Se A A N is calculated by dividing by number of Downlink RSSI Min 4SUB samples E RSSI Uplink dBm per tone E 2 5M2 Uplink RSSI Avg 4SU9 E 3 0M Uplink RSSI Max 4SU8 E Uplink RSSI Min 4SU7 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information MS KPIs Table 11 9 4Motion SU KPIs
159. disabled Checking required packages Package SUNWapchr found Package SUNWapchu found Package SUNWbash found Package SUNWggrp found Package SUNWgtar found Package SUNWgzip found Package SUNWlexpt found Package SUNWsshcu found Package Package hdu found Package hr found Package hu found Done Checking required packages for the schematic map feature Package SUNWpng found Package SUNWzlib found Done Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detai be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program li Figure 2 64 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks 2 5 2 2 License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting 2 5 2 3 Installing the Embedded Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user utilized during the Oracle installation This part can take up to 30 minutes depending on the computer characteristics After providing it the application tries to find an Oracle user on the machine Only if such a user does not exist will the installer prompt for installing the internal Or
160. e on page 78 Installation on Linux Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 86 Any Oracle 10 client compatible with 32 bit Red Hat 5 Installation on Linux Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine on page 96 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation General Prerequisites Table 2 1 Selecting Installation Types Continued Operating System architecture Installation Sources Oracle database server version Oracle client version Refer to system installed on StarQuality machine Demo Trial External database on BW Cygwin E For R2 Version supplied with the RN same machine StarQuality DVD E For 2008 Standard 10203_vista_w2k8_x86_production_db E StarQuality exe E Oracle Server Installation The Oracle kit included in the DVD covers the Oracle license only if it is installed together with StarQuality internal database installation If you install an external DB purchase a licence separately 2 1 2 General Prerequisites The following are general prerequisites for all installation types The computer on which the server is installed must comply with the hardware and software requirements detailed in the Release Notes The computer on which the StarQuality Server and or Oracle database are installed must be dedicated to running these applications The Operating System must be freshly installed The computers should have the latest
161. e measurement results can be reviewed in chart format by selecting the concrete equipment You can export the measurement data to Excel by clicking the Export to XLS link at the top right corner of each chart Viewing Measurements by Time Span Click one of the icons to define the time span of measurements to be displayed Table 5 2 Time Span Options Icon Tooltip Description Realtime view The data is updated periodically ba Historical view by date A calendar is displayed Select the desired day week Kai month and year to display measurements for that time i span Historical view by time Specify the time interval hours seconds etc ai Click on a given point of the graph to display the data in finer detail zoom in to a selected time instant Click before the left edge or after the right edge of the graph respectively to move the selected time interval backwards and forwards Chart Display Options Because of minimizing the required chart drawings StarQuality draws only the first 20 charts and the others are visible only when scrolling down the page Click one of the icons to set the chart display options in the View group Figure 5 10 Table 5 3 Chart Display Options Icon Tooltip Description Large Charts The charts appear in one column Medium Charts The charts appear in two columns StarQuality User Manual Se amp 163 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Chart
162. e Cure C Exp View Category CO Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install Interpreters 43 Install Libs 43 Install Math 43 Install Net 4 Install EI Perl 4 Install 47 5 8 8 4 nja 9 972k perl Python 4 Install Perl Version s JV Hide obsolete packages Ss Figure 2 29 Select Packages Window Perl Version 12 Click Next The installation procees starts 47 Cygwin Setup Progress This page displays the progress of the download or installation Lg Installing libdb4 5 4 5 20 2 2 Husr bin cygbz2 1 dll Progress gg Total EEE Disk md Figure 2 30 Cygwin Installation Process 13 Click Finish StarQuality User Manual 8 E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality Cygwin Setup Installation Status and Create Icons jo Create Icons gt Tell setup if you want it to create a few icons for convenient access to the Cygwin environment IV Create icon on Desktop JV Add icon to Start Menu Installation Status Installation Complete Figure 2 31 Cygwin Installation Completion 2 3 2 Installing StarQuality 2 3 2 1 Overview This Installation type is applicable when installing StarQuality on a Windows server with an external Oracle database on the same machine refer to Table 2 1 The installation has to be performed by a local administrator user During the installation the installer writes information into two destina
163. e Measurements browser click the Chart Settings icon The Chart settings options are displayed in the browser EX E su 00 10 7 0A EA 88 MS Burst Error Rate Downlink Export to XLS zl View show_details 800 ES HE 700 Display deleted 600 D Split view 500 Chart settings E e O Flash M 200 Indicator Individual Common 2 1 Yprefix Automatic None Peak Ki Lei ESA 2011 08 21 03 35 2011 08 21 11 05 2011 08 21 18 35 2011 08 22 02 05 2011 08 22 09 35 2011 08 22 17 05 Res C small Medium Large Minimum lt Successfully Transferred Bursts Qty Dropped Bursts otv Retransmissions Maximum OK Elements su 00 10 7 0A EA 88 MS Burst Error Rate Ratio Downlink Export to XLS Figure 5 11 Chart Settings in Measurements 2 Set the display options Flash allows displaying the following options see Figure 5 12 9 gt StarQuality User Manual View or hide specific measurements by clicking their check box Mouse point on a spot displays the date time and measurement values Mouse point on Show details displays the average last min and max values of the measurement It also displays any firmware changes for the device Right click and set a trendline calculation for any element Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Chart Settings ROOT gt Big setups gt 10 10 141 150 gt BS 0 0 2 13 13 13 Measurements Operati
164. e Name view Jaga Agent Nvswi Availabilty view Jaga Agent Nvswi RTT view Jaga Agent Nvswi RTT MinMax view Jaga Agent Nvsw2 Availability view Jaga Agent Nvsw2 RTT view Jaga Agent Nvsw2 RTT MinMax Back Figure 9 36 Missing Measurements at a Given Time StarQuality User Manual Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI In this chapter MH Introduction on page 269 M Configuring SMTP Connection on page 270 M e mail and SNMP Notifications on page 271 SOAP Interface on page 272 Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI Introduction 10 1 Introduction The StarQuality Northbound Interface NBI functionality provides the following capabilities M Sending e mail notifications to any number of recipients regarding server management events M Sending e mail notifications to any number of mail recipients regarding threshold crossing events Sending SNMP traps to upper level management system OSS Forwarding reports defined in the system on a recurring basis M Performing operations using the SOAP interface StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZS 2 Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI Configuring SMTP Connection 10 2 Configuring SMTP Connection The StarQuality server can be configured to send e mail notifications to a list of recipients about various events occurring within the system For example server up down collection failure 10 2 1 Prerequisites E An SMTP server is
165. e SUNWzlib found Done Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detai be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program li Figure 2 67 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks 2 7 2 2 License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting 2 7 2 3 Connection Details of External Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user used during the Oracle installation After providing it it tries to determine the value of the ORACLE_HOME environment variable using that user and asks for confirmation QUESTION The OS user of Oracle oracle INFO Found Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 QUESTION ORACLE HOME environment variable export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 INFO Checking the Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db 1 INFO Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 seems to be OK INFO Checking Oracle version INFO Found Oracle version 10 INFO Detected 64 bit Oracle StarQuality
166. e base stations will be created below this ROOT site Cancel Figure 4 4 Adding a New AlvariSTAR gt StarQuality Module StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZE Chapter 4 Network Discovery Activation Deactivation of Data Collection 3 Fill in the following information Name Free text for example auto discovery Type Select Other and AlvariSTAR gt StarQuality Host Login Pwd and Directory Copy the values from any other valid collector AlvariSTAR SOAP URL Use any of the following http IP address 8080 bwanmsws http IP address 8080 bwanmsws entitymanager http IP address 8080 bwanmsws configurationservice The Base stations will be created below this site ROOT 4 Click OK The system allocates a site with the matching collector type 4Motion Extreme BreezeACCESS etc below the specified site INFORMATION If a site with the same collector type already exists the newly discovered equipment will be added to it Otherwise a new site with the matching collector type will be created and the newly discovered equipment will be placed there 5 Activate the collector From Settings select Start Stop Status select the newly created site and click Start 4 2 3 Activation Deactivation of Data Collection When you create a site data collection is by default activated for all AUs and SUs except for SNMP FDD ver3 5 3 6 and BreezeACCESS VL SUs The following procedure de
167. e installation the installer writes information into two destinations the Details view and the log file To display the Details view click Show Details in the installation wizard The log file is located in the Temp directory of the user by default C Documents and Settings lt USER gt Local Settings Temp 2 2 2 2 Procedure I Ensure that the pre installation tasks are complete as required in Section 2 2 1 2 Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive and copy the Installation folder directly onto one of the disk drives for example CH NOTE gg e Do not place the installation files into a folder with a long path e g on the desktop This is an Oracle H installer limitation 3 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp 20 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality isl Es Welcome to the StarQuality Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of StarQuality It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue Figure 2 10 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window 4 Click Next The wizard displays the license agreement Read the agreement carefully M starQuality Setup Me x License Agreement Please review the license terms before installin
168. e installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server is running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically StarQuality User Manual Se amp amp 2 8 2 7 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT WARNING HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE QUESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Y WARNING IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE THAT LEI WARNING IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE WARNING APPLICATION INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc6 d KOlstarqualit
169. e list Use the arrows lt gt at the top of the list StarQuality User Manual 0000G gt Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Overview Table 7 1 Using the Alarms List Continued To Do this Comments Sort the list by column Click on the column header entries Sort in Click the up down arrows The numbers indicate the order ascending descending under the column header order Download the table Click the view xls link Obtain detailed information of an entry Click the view link the corresponding measurement values are displayed in a chart Acknowledge an alarm Click the ack link if the alarm has already been acknowledged the time and name of the user that acknowledged are displayed in the table If the alarm is not a threshold violation but is from an event definition and the event has not yet been closed a del link appears Delete close an alarm Click the ack link if available Deleting an alarm is necessary for example if there is no closing event in the definition or a trap has been lost or if the alarm is not relevant anymore In this case if the alarm has not been acknowledged yet then it becomes acknowledged as well ROOT Operation 7j Link Threshold name Level From To Duration Interval TDD Occupation uplink lt 60 2 Critical 2009 03 04 04 00 00 10 00 00 15 min Me
170. e several minutes User dropped Done Do you want to drop the Oracle tablespace SQ_DATA lt Y N gt N y Dropping the Oracle tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minut dropped Done Do you want to drop the Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF lt Y N gt N y Dropping the Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF this could take several minut Tablespace dropped Done Do you want to restore the Apache configuration lt Y N gt N n Do you want to delete the entire opt starquality directory lt Y N gt N Deleting the directory opt starquality Deleting any starquality files in the etc rc d directories Deleting any K starquality files in the etc rc d directories Deleting the file etc init d starquality Done Do you want to delete the user starg lt Y N gt N y Deleting the user starq Deleting the group starq Deleting the directory opt starquality Done Figure 2 74 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris StarQuality User Manual a e e 2 13 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation Troubleshooting Installation Troubleshooting Problem Issue Action The installer cannot connect to the database in Windows Use a password that does not contain problematic characters etc The installation log is located in C Documents and Settings lt user gt Local Settings Temp 7 Cannot start SSHD 1 Delete the SSHD user 2 Delete the cygwin folder 3 Remove any cygwin and SSHD ent
171. ease Setup Program Window 4 Click Next The Choose a Download Source window is displayed StarQuality User Manual amp E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Type DP x Choose Download Source CE Choose whether to install or download from the internet or install from files in local directory Install from Internet downloaded files will be kept for future re use Download Without Installing lt Back Cancel Figure 2 46 Choose a Download Source Window 5 Select Install from Local directory and click Next The Select Root Install Directory window is displayed Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Directory Select Root Install Directory E Select the directory where you want to install Cygwin Also choose a few installation parameters M Root Directory i Browse Install For Default Text File Type All Users RECOMMENDED Unix binary RECOMMENDED Cygwin will be available to all users of No line translation done all files opened the system NOTE This is required if in binary mode Files on disk will have you wish to run services like sshd etc LF line endings C Just Me DOS text Cygwin will only be available to the Line endings will be translated from unix current user Only select this if you lack LF to DOS CR LF on write and vice Admin privileges or you have specific versa on read need
172. ease select Oracle home directory Oracle home directory Space available 11 9GB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 Back Cancel Figure 2 16 Oracle Directory a Click Next A command line window is displayed Figure 2 17 showing the Oracle database installation progress INFORMATION Wi The Oracle database installation may take 30 60 minutes depending on the machine characteristics A During this time the installation progress is displayed in the console If the console is idle for more than 10 minutes check for errors StarQuality User Manual amp SS 24 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality WINDOWS system32icmd exe C cygwin opt starquality lib gt cd GC NecygwinNoptNstarqualityWWindows Silent C NeygwinNoptNystarqualityWWindows Silent gt call setup Main bat SETUP ADD G Ncygwil nNoptNstarqualitywWlindows SilentNoraparam 1 2 ini Figure 2 17 Installation Progress 11 Enter and confirm the required password Use the Windows password for the same user or leave empty M starquality Setup BBE StarQuality Service registration The service will run as Administrator with the given password ServiceLogin Administrator Password Confirm password Cancel Figure 2 18 StarQuality Windows Service Registration 12 Click Next The Oracle Connection page is displayed Figure 2 19 StarQuality User Manual Gi amp O 25 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installati
173. ecific Information In this chapter Introduction on page 274 Saving Performance Collection Files on page 275 BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment on page 276 BreezeACCESS VL on page 283 AMotion on page 293 BreezeMAX Extreme on page 317 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Introduction 11 1 Introduction This chapter provides device specific information regarding software compatibility and limitations traffic and performance KPIs codes for thresholds and default built in reports This information may help you focus on the details required for each equipment type when using StarQuality KPIs Key Performance Indicators exist for three types of entities M Slot also referred to as AU sector BS M SU also referred to as MS CPE M NPU also referred to as BTS in common measurements StarQuality User Manual Se amp D D Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Saving Performance Collection Files 11 2 Saving Performance Collection Files WiMAX devices generate performance collection files in cycles of 15 minutes You can set up StarQuality to keep the performance collection files vw To set up performance collection files saving I Goto opt starquality ett and open the CONFIG Mi pm file 2 Set the WIMAX KEEP XML FILES parameter to 1 to enable performance files or to O to disable them default 3 Save the CONFIG Mom file 4 Restart all the collectors Each XML perfo
174. ecific versa on read needs Read more about file modes lt Back Cancel Figure 2 25 Select Root Install Directory Window StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 34 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 6 Choose the default settings recommended on the screen Verify that the Root directory is a local drive and click Next The Select Local Package Directory window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Local Package Directory JOPx Select Local Package Directory 2 Select a directory where you want Setup to store the installation files it downloads The directory will be created if it does not already exist Local Package Directory CATEMPSCyawinFromywwGoh4Coms CygwinFromywwG oh4Corm Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 2 26 Select Local Package Directory Window 7 Verify that the path to the Local Package Directory is correct and click Next The Select Packages window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Packages Mel x Select Packages a Select packages to install C Keep Prev e C Exp View Category Cas New 8 See Package D All 4 Default Admin 4 Default Audio 6 Default Base 4 Default Database 4 Default Devel Default Doc 6 Default Editors amp Default Gnome 4 Default All Defaul entry ofl JV Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 27 Select Packages Window All Default Init
175. ect this if you lack LF to DOS CR LF on write and vice Admin privileges or you have specific versa on read needs Read more about file modes lt Back Cancel Figure 2 3 Select Root Install Directory Window StarQuality User Manual Se amp Ca Q Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 6 Choose the default settings recommended on the screen Verify that the Root directory is a local drive and click Next The Select Local Package Directory window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Local Package Directory JOPx Select Local Package Directory 2 Select a directory where you want Setup to store the installation files it downloads The directory will be created if it does not already exist Local Package Directory CATEMPSCyawinFromywwGoh4Coms CygwinFromywwG oh4Corm Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 2 4 Select Local Package Directory Window 7 Verify that the path to the Local Package Directory is correct and click Next The Select Packages window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Packages Mel x Select Packages a Select packages to install C Keep Prev e C Exp View Category Cas New 8 See Package D All 4 Default Admin 4 Default Audio 6 Default Base 4 Default Database 4 Default Devel Default Doc 6 Default Editors amp Default Gnome 4 Default All Defaul entry ofl JV Hide obsolete package
176. ed as well as the searching string as it could be given at simple search StarQuality User Manual Se amp Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Searching Measurements Mien Search EE w Search object MSU 00 10 5757 parent yes result 50 W iee x Display deleted Elements view all Type Name Parenttype Parentname view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 9 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 7 22 57 58 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 7 22 57 58 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 7 22 58 16 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 7 22
177. ed on the machine from which the client is opened the following message appears Windows Internet Explorer EG The application based on your settings wants to display the charts as Flash objects but the required Flash 8 player had not been installed yet Do you want to download the Flash player now Cancel Figure 3 2 Flash Player Message Window You can install Flash to display data with Flash functionality If you do not install Flash the data is displayed without Flash features 3 You can proceed with discovering the network see Network Discovery on page 131 modify settings or start monitoring the equipment Alarm StarQuality avarice A LEL enee Overview and Log Out Main menu Submenu gt a er panel ES Ss J Browser L Work Area Figure 3 3 The StarQuality User Interface StarQuality User Manual Se 8 amp Chapter 3 Getting Started The Structure of Interface Windows 3 2 The Structure of Interface Windows The interface of the StarQuality application divides the browser window into several panels see Figure 3 3 HM Alarm overview bar displays current alarms grouped by their severity level This also acts as a shortcut to the alarm screens The application displays only alarms that the user has permissions to view H access to alarms is unavailable the bar is completely missing HM The
178. elect the measurements you want to activate deactivate in the lower table d Click OK e Go back one level in the navigation path and verify that the equipment line is no longer red activated or is red if deactivated Figure 4 6 StarQuality User Manual Se amp 140 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Activation Deactivation of Data Collection Site and equipment confi 4 Navigation ROOT gt EDD TFTP gt 10 0 16 21 SUs Operation sl path Name 10 0 16 21 SUs mi Server Group WiMAX FDD TFTP Creating Type Description Collection edit del Not IP add 10 0 16 21 Activated re E Er a ress 0 10 edit del 900 10 722 Equipment i Community public a 22 IP address 10 0 16 21 edit del S AWENA Faupment 31 85 Community public Collection edit del SU00 10 7 22 po e IP address 10 0 16 21 el quipmen 30 38 Community public Activated Figure 4 6 Data Collection Status StarQuality User Manual Se amp D Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 4 3 Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site This section describes how to add equipment related to server health to the StarQuality and initiate the data collection from them For these equipment types only a single device is discovered each time that is there is no multiple discovery You can use a template or create new equipment from scratch The procedures in t
179. em that optimizes WiMAX network performance identifies network problems and bottlenecks maximizes traffic capacity and optimizes resource allocation StarQuality performance and traffic monitoring system ensures QoS and WiMAX network optimization It provides various sets of lists and report types through an intuitive and simple Web GUI client It also enables defining Threshold Crossing Alerts an alarm may be generated depending on the occurrence of several rule violations StarQuality is an essential element for optimizing the wireless network functionality radio planning ensuring service performance and problem identification 1 1 2 Star Management Suite Overview The Star management suite is a comprehensive robust carrier grade network management solution for enabling rapid network deployment and seamless cost effective operation of WiMAX services The Star Suite includes M AlvariSTAR Base station management for WiMAX network deployment and operation E StarACS Device management system supporting TR 69 devices E StarDM Large scale multi protocol standards based device management system supporting WiMAX devices for automated device activation and service introduction M StarQuality Performance and traffic monitoring system for ensuring QoS and WiMAX network optimization M StarReport Powerful Business Objects based tool providing network configuration and performance visibility for improved decision support 1 1 3 Supported
180. ent Network Substrate Password for SYSTEM user Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Solaris 10 x86 operating system using the command line installer All operations should be done while logged in as root user To install StarQuality Solaris I Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 Follow the next sections for installation details Basic Checks The installer checks the following details E Version of the operating system M Required packages RB Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation StarQuality User Manual Se amp E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality e Telnet 10 10 187 126 hash 3 66H StarQuality vu2 en bin INFO Command line parameters Installer started LOG file tmp starquality install log Checking perl ve i Found perl usr Checking OS type OS Solaris_x86 Checking perl 32 64bit Checking perl PerllO Perl was built with PerllO Checking perl threading Perl threading disabled Checking required packages Package SUNWapchr found Package SUNWapchu found Package SUNWbash found Package
181. er Click Finish to close this wizard Figure 2 44 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation 17 Click Finish to close the wizard 18 Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation 19 Load a licence and run StarQuality Refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 105 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 105 StarQuality User Manual Se amp O Q 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 1 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installationinstallation on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Installation on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system This installation type involves the installation of the following components M Oracle server on a separate machine M Oracle client on the StarQuality machine E cygwin BW StarQuality The required steps are 1 Configure network ports Section 2 4 1 1 2 Install Oracle server Section 2 4 1 2 Install Cygwin Section 2 4 1 3 NR UW Install StarQuality Section 2 4 1 4 5 Load a StarQuality license Section 2 10 1 6 Run StarQuality Section 2 10 2 Pre installation Tasks Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client ma
182. er DW New Sections Importing and Exporting Report Definitions on page 217 Scheduling Report Delivery on page 219 Bulk Export External API on page 229 To delete an On Demand report on page 216 StarQuality User Manual amp OO Document History Changed Item Description Date Chapter 9 General Setting Options HM Completely revised chapter to describe only applicable tasks E Moved Search to Getting Started E Audit Trail and User Administration sections removed M New functionality Managing Equipment with Unsuccessful Measurements on page 240 Managing Inactive Equipments on page 242 Merging Sector Data Following Sector Name Change on page 243 A4Motion Data Collection Gap Filling on page 245 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information M Added Saving Performance Collection Files on page 275 E Added 4Motion Ver 3 5 M Added KPIs for Extreme Ver 1 8 E Restructured the tables to include measurement names together with their codes Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI Revised Ver 3 5 Jan 2012 StarQuality User Manual Legal Rights Legal Rights Copyright 2012 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors No disclosure
183. er with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine New section Ver 3 1 10 March 2011 User levels and Their Settings on page 5 Converted the information into a table Installing StarQuality on page 38 E Added Oracle XE option MW Added Installation Troubleshooting on page 116 Configuring Network Ports Added SMTP server 25 General Added internal cross references for easier navigation Ver 3 5 Jan 2012 StarQuality User Manual Document History Changed Item Description Date Chapter 3 Getting Started M Converted information into tables Ver 3 5 Jan 2012 E Moved Search into this chapter Chapter 4 Network Discovery E Restructured E Overview Updated the supported versions E Setting Automatic Discovery of Equipment from AlvariSTAR new section M Moved the following to Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Setting the Delay Parameter on 4Motion Base Stations Setting the Timeout and Retry Parameters for 4Motion TFTP Saving Performance Collection Files M Scheduled Configuration section removed Displaying Elements Side by Side New section Chapter 6 Setting Alarm E New sections Thresholds Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates M To create a new threshold template on page 176 added new fields Chapter 8 Reports E Revised chapt
184. eration sl Parent site ROOT Name Description Choose an icon Ki icon_site png v l Server group ro server group definied sl No server aroup definied Oracle Oracle SNMP SNMP Unix Linux Unix Linux WiMAX 4Motion WiMAX 4Motion WiMAX Extreme WiMAX Extreme WiMAX FDD WiMAX FDD WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX TDD WiMAX TDD WiMAX VL WiMAX VL Figure 4 1 Creating a New Site Server Group Selection 5 Click OK The network site is created under the ROOT 6 Proceed with discovery of devices according to the site type you created refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 135 gt To create a Server Health site under ROOT I From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 From the Creation drop down menu select Create New Site Fill in the site name free text and its description optional LA Select a corresponding icon N Select the SNMP Server Group see Figure 4 1 StarQuality User Manual amp amp 133 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Overview 5 Click OK The site is created under the ROOT 6 Proceed with discovery of devices according to the site type you created refer to Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site on page 142 StarQuality User Manual Se D Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of WiMAX Devices 4 2 Discovery of WiMAX Devices Data collection is automatically activated after discovery except for equipment
185. export to x s format Browser a TC Sarl Gesi Ve gt Obiect parameters gt eier WI PSS TARE TT SU RATE MAX Rate Saa ae BG Equipment Equipment Measurement Downlink Shabana zeen H meen zu description Sdt Uplink MaxMax SS MaxMax mg 22 aie 2503 aneres GE 300 so ZS 3 Sot 3 Y 00 107 2 32 18 SURATE MAX 8 00 8 00 Day Week Month Year chart settings Figure 8 14 On demand Reports Show To delete an On Demand report gt I Run the report as described above until one step before saving steps 1to 9 2 Instead of choosing Show simply delete the measurement name and click OK The report is deleted StarQuality User Manual Chapter 8 Reports Importing and Exporting Report Definitions 8 3 Importing and Exporting Report Definitions You can export report definitions as xm files and import export them to from another StarQuality system or for backup StarQuality exports the view definition as you set see Defining Report Views on page 208 and also the required report variable definitions gt To export a report s I From the Settings menu select Reports gt Report export The Report Export window is displayed 01 Report variables 02 Report views Report export 03 Report export 04 Report import I Name Type 05 Scheduled reports 06 Scheduled equipment send JT Motion BottomN Uptime TopN IT Motion TopN Air Link Utilization TopN IF 4Motion
186. file To display the Details view click Show Details in the installation wizard The log file is located in the Temp directory of the user by default C Documents and Settings lt USER gt Local Settings Temp 2 4 1 6 Procedure I Ensure that the pre installation tasks are complete as required in Section 2 4 1 2 Do one of the following Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive and copy the Installation folder directly onto one of the disk drives for example CH NOTE Do not place the installation files into a folder with a long path This is an Oracle installer limitation StarQuality User Manual Se amp SE Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 3 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed M starQuality Setup Bisi E Welcome to the StarQuality Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of StarQuality It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system Files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue Figure 2 54 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window 4 Click Next The wizard displays the license agreement Read the agreement carefully M starQuality Setup Ale x License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing StarQuality Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement This progra
187. following methods I Simple search type the string directly in the input field and click OK 2 Click Advanced Search an advanced window is displayed which facilitates the construction of the searching string and contains the following insert fields a Search to parent name Yes No If you select yes the search finds those objects whose parent name meets the conditions e g the parent is the containing site for a piece of equipment b Name Name of the object to be searched The _ and characters match an arbitrary single letter while and match an arbitrary string The expressions in separate lines will be in OR relation with each other StarQuality User Manual Se Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Searching Measurements c Without Characters to be ignored by the system the format is the same as above d Type The type of the object to be searched Subtype can also be given for equipment equipment template and measurement type e Display deleted Specify whether to add to the currently displayed measurements the measurements from deleted equipments or measurements from previous versions f Results count Maximum number of results Search 1 e Search OK Simple Search by parent gt attribute No search Field mme SSS Search Without Type an types v Display deleted No z Results count 50 count v Figure 5 13 Advanced Search 3 Click OK The results are display
188. for which none of the measurements are successful or disconnected The Unsuccessful measurements option measurements for which data is unavailable is not applicable 3 Use the check boxes to select the action for the failed devices Deactivate data collection Stop data collection of inactive equipment Delete Remove inactive equipment from the database Delete empty parent objects If as a result of a deletion a parent object remains empty it is deleted as well The empty parent deletion propagates upward through the hierarchy if the parent s parent is now empty it is also deleted and so forth 4 Use the Server group drop down list to select a collector group for your search 5 Use the Time span drop down list to select for how long the items have been unsuccessful 6 Click Search The equipment or measurements that match your search criteria are listed below the search box Options Inactive equipments Unsuccessful measurements Deactivate data collection Delete Delete empty parent objects Ee o oo Server group WiMAX TDD WiMAX TDD Time span 1 hour gt Search O Type Name NW Equipment SU 00 10 E7 62 12 47 O Equipment SU 00 10 E7 62 15 1F Vv Equipment SU 00 10 E7 E2 34 AE Vv Equipment SU 11 11 11 11 11 13 Figure 9 9 Selecting Inactive Equipment 7 From the list either select the first check box to mark all the list items for deletion deactivation or select individual items by selecting the c
189. g Alarm Thresholds describes how to create threshold templates and assigning them to equipment Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring describes the alarms and how to navigate view and filter them It also explains how to download data to Excel files Chapter 8 Reports Setting and viewing reports Chapter 9 General Setting Options describes how to set the site and equipment configuration thresholds customizing server configuration and management audit trail and user administration Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI describes the StarQuality Northbound Interface NBI functionality Chapter 11 Device Specific Information contains details about software compatibility traffic and performance counters codes for thresholds and default built in reports Glossary Explanation of commonly used terms StarQuality User Manual ES Q Contents Contents Chapter 1 Mtroducti M ege eege e EE une 1 1 1 Systemi DEE re 2 1 1 1 General eege EE 2 1 1 2 Star Management Suite Overvi W ssssssssssrsssrurnnernnrnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnn nnen n nnmnnn 2 1 1 3 S pp rted ENEE 2 1 2 System Data St ct r sissors KREE ENEE EEN EENS EEN eege EN 4 1 3 User levels and Their ZER sed ee eu See 5 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation csccsissccisiicscsncccsensssescensdsiecsncneseesdsmseosecseenesaseune 6 2 1 a de E d Le EE 7 2 1 1 Installation TYDES rmes EE 7 2 1 2 General Prer guisites snerige E a a E
190. g Alarm Thresholds Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments 5 Click OK to view the list of relevant equipments for this threshold template All are checked by default and you can select the equipment s _ _ d SETTINGS 2 Search q Ee Er EEE 104 Scheduled configuration S gt Set 07 Templates D Thresholds DN Lox Threshold configuration 3 items found Expression TDD 10 10 182 201 Slot 3 Ar Link Occupation Uplink lt 70 0 2x in 3 sample and TDD 10 10 182 201 Slot 3 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 3x in 3 sample 700 30 30 182 201 Sot 2 Ar Urk Occupation Upink lt 70 0 2xin 3 sample ad 1DD 10 10 182 201 Sot 2 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 3x in 3 sample sample lt 70 0 in3 and TOD 10 30 182 201 Siot 1 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 3xin 3 sample OK Cancel Figure 6 7 Relevant Equipments 6 Click OK The system creates the selected thresholds To assign a threshold from template to a specific BTS I Access the Site and Equipment Configuration in one of the following methods From Measurements select the equipment and from the Operations pull down menu select Go To Configuration From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 Scroll down to the Threshold section and click From Template or choose New Threshold from Template from the operations drop down menu 3 Select a template
191. g StarQuality Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement This program contains free of charge third party Java Perl and NSIS software libraries as well a Cygwin running environment The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be Found in the third party directory on the installer CD By clicking I Agree you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT the Agreement READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE vi If you accept the terms of the agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back I Agree Cancel Figure 2 11 Licence Agreement 5 Click I Agree The wizard displays components to install StarQuality User Manual amp SS 21 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality starQuality Setup Bisi E Choose Components Choose which Features of StarQuality you want to install Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue r Description Position your mouse over Component ta see its description Select components to install Space required 185 6MB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 Let ane Figure 2 12 Choose Components 6 Click Next The StarQuality installat
192. g Started on page 118 3 Thresholds Creating and managing thresholds and their templates Refer to Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring on page 194 4 Reports admin only Creating and managing reports Refer to Chapter 8 Reports on page 204 5 Customization Setting display preferences and e mail addresses The other functions are not applicable 6 Templates Creating and managing templates for measurements equipment and thresholds Importing and exporting templates Some of the options are not applicable to StarQuality users Refer to Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 174 StarQuality User Manual Se amp E Chapter 9 General Setting Options Overview 7 Servers Licences Displaying and configuring the currently used and available licences Device and measurement summary Viewing the list of all basic equipments and the number of objects in the system for each measurement type Server groups Not applicable Configuration of individual measuring groups Server configuration Modifying the measurement servers and other servers Start Stop Status Remote management of individual servers Server events Viewing the events that occurred during self testing Collector load Viewing the load of the collectors and listing the unsuccessful measurements at a given date 8 Audit Trail admin only Not applicable Displaying the individual configuration modifications 9 Use
193. g terms are frequently used in this manual API AU BS BTS CIR CINR CPE Equipment HARQ MCS MIR MS NBI NE Public Private objects ROOT Site RSSI SINR SNR SOAP Site StarQuality User Manual Application Program Interface interface which enables an application program to communicate with the operating system and other services provided by the operating system Access Unit Base Station Base Transceiver Station Committed Information Rate Carrier to Interference plus Noise Ratio Customer Premises Equipment the basic sampled unit Two types of equipment are used in the StarQuality system E AU Slot BS Sector in TDD or FDD only E SU CPE MS Hybrid Automatic Repeated Request Modulation Coding Scheme Maximum Information Rate Mobile Subscriber Northbound Interface Network Element Public objects sites etc are created by the admin user for the whole system Private object are created by the local user for the local system only the basic system network site under which you can create sites and virtual sites Received Signal Strength Indication Signal Interference Noise Ratio Signal to Noise Ratio Simple Object Access Protocol An interface to enable various NBI operations via third party applications HM Non virtual A base station containing up to 7 AUs on which measurements are collected E Virtual Site any collection of equipments grouped by various subjects such as areas
194. gement Admin only 255 9 5 1 VEVEN 255 9 5 2 Licence COMA AUN E 256 9 5 3 Device and Measurement Summary annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 258 9 5 4 Server CCT NN Sens 259 9 5 5 Start Stop Status of Detten eegen E Eege 263 9 5 6 Viewing Server Events Javed eebe henuaieeteinanh enka namheteaneneadaxanabanaanabasans 264 StarQuality User Manual SE ES Contents 9 5 7 Viewing Collector Load Information EEN 265 Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBl annrnrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 268 10 1 Intr ductiom WE 269 10 2 Configuring SMTP CEDIES ee 270 10 2 1 FE SUS Eee 270 10 22 EERSTEN 270 10 3 e mail and SNMP Notifications sicciecceeccesscencssereesccnnesneedeacnurendoccesenueeteerewenenuenteoes 271 10 3 1 e mail Notifications and Traps of Threshold Crossing Events 271 1032 Scheduled REPO pririgardas EEEE aAa a 271 1035 EECHER 271 104 SOAP erte 272 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information ENEE ENEE ENEE 273 111 IntroduUctiOM EE 274 11 2 Saving Performance Collection FileS r rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenen 275 11 3 BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment eennnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnuenen 276 RK NR e EM EM E a 276 11 3 2 Network Discovery PrerequisiteS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 277 11 3 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIS EN 277 11 3 4 Default Built in et men 28
195. guration 03 Bulk measurement discovery 04 Bulk deletion D OK Advanced 05 Search for unsuccessful Search object typerequip result 50 are measurements 06 Bulk inactive equipment activation or deletion Search gt Search for collection gaps Ip 07 Equipment configuration export T Type Name Parent type Parent name 08 Bulk equipment update ci Equipment 01 03 Site AN 09 SNMP discovery 10 Fill WiMAX 4Motion collection gaps Vv Equipment 01_04 Site M 11 Inactive sector merge K Equipment 01_05 ASN 199 Site M ei Equipment 01 06 Site m K Equipment 01_07 ASN 198 Site mM ei Equipment 01 08 Site am e Equipment 01 09 Site m Figure 9 17 Search for Collection Gaps 5 Click the Search for collection gaps link at the top left of the window active only if at least one BTS is selected If no collection gaps are found the following message is displayed TTT T a e Search gt Search for collection gaps Prev The data collection for the selected device s was successful during the last day Figure 9 18 No Collection Gaps Notification If gaps were found a list of results is displayed showing missing collection intervals their dates and reasons Sie and equipment confi ix Search gt Search for collection gaps Prev I Missing collection intervals Name Date Reason 7 192 168 198 11 2011 06 23 11 30 00 Could not query the device using SNMP or PVSR wes not running 192 168 198 11 2011 05
196. gure 2 23 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program Window 4 Click Next The Choose a Download Source window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Type DP x Choose Download Source CE Choose whether to install or download from the internet or install from files in local directory Install from Internet downloaded files will be kept for future re use Download Without Installing lt Back Cancel Figure 2 24 Choose a Download Source Window 5 Select Install from Local directory and click Next The Select Root Install Directory window is displayed Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Directory Select Root Install Directory E Select the directory where you want to install Cygwin Also choose a few installation parameters M Root Directory i Browse Install For Default Text File Type All Users RECOMMENDED Unix binary RECOMMENDED Cygwin will be available to all users of No line translation done all files opened the system NOTE This is required if in binary mode Files on disk will have you wish to run services like sshd etc LF line endings C Just Me DOS text Cygwin will only be available to the Line endings will be translated from unix current user Only select this if you lack LF to DOS CR LF on write and vice Admin privileges or you have sp
197. he basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting Connection Details of External Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user used during the Oracle installation After providing it it tries to determine the value of the ORACLE_HOME environment variable using that user and asks for confirmation QUESTION The OS user of Oracle oracle INFO Found Oracle home home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 QUESTION ORACLE HOME environment variable home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 StarQuality User Manual Se amp 20 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Checking the Oracle home home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 INFO Oracle home home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 seems to be OK INFO Checking Oracle version INFO Found Oracle version 10 INFO Detected 32 bit Oracle QUESTION StarQuality OS user name starq QUESTION StarQuality OS user group starq QUESTION StarQuality OS user password QUESTION StarQuality installation directory below the opt directory starquality INFO Creating group stargq INFO Creating user starq with shell usr local bin bash INFO Setting the user password INFO Select user starq and group starq with directory opt starquality
198. his section describe the recommended way of creating equipment from templates For more information refer to Site and Equipment Configuration on page 233 and Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 135 mi gt To add an AlvariSTAR server I Make sure the following prerequisites are available Setup and configuration Network connection between StarQuality and AlvariSTAR machines AlvariSTAR ver 4 0 and later Information AlvariSTAR machine IP address Read community of AlvariSTAR SNMP server if not changed the default is public 2 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 3 Click the Server Health icon to enter its site 4 From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipment from Template 5 Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup AlvariSTAR 6 Click OK A basic setup template page is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se 8 142 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Template name AlvariStar Equipment name A 2 Equipment description IP address 172 30 105 210 16162 Community public Timeout sec 10 Retries 1 Default measurement Ti e interval Choose an icon feen eauippng Timeout sec Configured Add immediately to job queue Cancel Figure 4 7 Creating New Equipment AlvariSTAR 7 Fill in the required information for parameter inf
199. host Administrator fopt starquality 03 00 e Data or gg edit 7 gaten Running MIGR localhost Administrator fopt starquality 01 00 edit 8 S Running CHART localhost Administrator opt starquality edit 3 Serie Running SCHED localhost Administrator opt starquality edit del 10 Greg Running SNMP SNMP localhost Administrator opt starquality Y edit del 11 orade Rumning Orade Orade localhost Administrator opt starquality Y edit del 12 le Running Unix Linux Unix Linux localhost Administrator opt starquality Y 3 WiMAX FDD WiMAX WiMAX Kg edit del 13 dolet Running FDD FDD localhost Administrator opt starquality Y MAMAY TAM MAMAY MIMAV Figure 9 29 Server Configuration Window The following information is displayed in the table M ID unique identifier of the server It is used when starting and halting the server from the command line or when displaying the summary of the collected data for the measurement servers Name the name of the server Status status of the server running not running or unknown Refer to Editing Server Configuration on page 261 M Type the type of the server or the type of the server group for collector servers SOAP Manager Event Server group for a measurement server the name of its group Host the host computer of the server Login the user name used to login to the machine Pwd user password If it is not set the application
200. hreshold template I From Settings select Templates gt Threshold Templates The Threshold Template Configuration list is displayed 01 MIB upload BE ae Threshold template configuration 03 Equipment templates Measurements 04 Threshold templates within the same 05 Threshold template export add new Name Threshold name equipment Level Type Expression 06 Threshold template import ed 07 Chart templates ECH 1111 test Sege Eden Warning Variable 1 WiMAX 4Motion Active MS Qty Table gt 5000 0 1x in 1 samp 08 Exclusion window templates Eg 09 Time zones i i toe FT Soh 1 now Motion BS or AU Not seen e SEES Warning tr Variable 1 WiMAX 4Motion Seen Table 0 1x in 1 sample seen edit del EthernetOAM Availability lt x Ber No The expression is wrong because the variable type is unknown O EA edit del EthernetOAM RTT gt x msec eien No The expression is wrong because the variable type is unknown O ER BS or now Extreme BS or AU Not seen GE lt desa gt ny Warning nei Variable 1 WiMAX Extreme Seen Table 0 1x in 1 sample seen BS or edit del now FDD BS or AU Not seen pit lt descr gt No Warning oad Variable 1 WiMAX FDD Seen Table 0 1x in 1 sample seen BS or feer GE now EOD TFTP BS or AU Not seen ep ee No Warning ic Variable 1 WiMAX FDD TFTP Seen Table 0 1x in 1 sample seen A edit det Host CP
201. ial State StarQuality User Manual amp eo Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 8 Click on the word Default in the main All entry package see Figure 2 6 and change it to Install Cygwin Setup Select Packages DS Select Packages a Select packages to install C Keep C Prev Cum C Exp View Category Caso New 18 See Package S S EI All 4 Install Admin 43 Install Audio 4 Install Base 4 Install Database 4 Install Devel amp Install Doc 4 Install Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install vw Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 28 Select Packages Window All Install H Verify that all the entries under the All main package have also been changed to Install If not change them 10 Scroll down to the Perl package and expand it by clicking on the sign 11 Check the sub package under Perl If it is different than 5 8 x x e g skip click on it to change it to the required 5 8 x X INFORMATION The Perl version must be 5 8 x x otherwise it does not meet the StarQuality requirements If you have a different Perl version use a different cygwin installation package StarQuality User Manual Se Be 36 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Select Packages ls Ea Select Packages Select packages to install E C Keep C Prey Z
202. id_ Each of these files represents a running StarQuality process and the number represents the collector number as can be seen in the StarQuality client Settings gt Servers gt Server Configuration Stop kill the process and resume the operation of the installer StarQuality User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started In this chapter Login on page 119 The Structure of Interface Windows on page 121 The Menu System on page 122 Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy on page 126 General Display Options on page 127 Editing Objects on page 129 Searching Objects on page 130 Chapter 3 Getting Started Login 3 1 Login 10 working clients may simultaneously use the system Using the system is possible with the following web browsers M Microsoft Internet Explorer M Mozilla Firefox To start a client session with StarQuality 1 Open a web browser and go to http lt ip or hostname gt The StarQuality opening window is displayed StarQuality Login Pwd Version 3 5 Figure 3 1 Login Window StarQuality User Manual amp O 19 Chapter 3 Getting Started Login 2 Enter the User Name and Password The default admin users credentials are admin admin123 The StarQuality opening window is displayed for a few moments and then the main interface window opens see Figure 3 3 If Flash Player is not install
203. ides simultaneously StarQuality User Manual Se amp oa 159 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Element Browsing Options Alarms Measurements Reports gt Settings gt Browser ROOT lox Time span ROOT gt EMS gt Macro ODU SUs ROOT gt EMS gt Macro ODU SUs gt BS 255 243 41 2 33 45 gt SU 00 12 CF 88 00 FE P Li su 00 12 0F 88 00 FE MCS Downlink v2 5 Export to XLS 4 El view DA D 0 9 re md 17 _ Back B50 0 2 1 2 1 BS BS BS 7 Os 0 0 2 10 10 10 255 243 40 25 25 12 255 243 41 100 amp 03 amp Display deleted S 01 2011 08 08 01 35 2011 08 08 14 05 2011 08 09 02 35 2011 08 09 15 05 Close split ven Fo rd lt un MG avg M max 1 Scrolling Individual X e D Chart settings 255 243 41 2 33 45 f 8 j Export to XLS Fees su 00 12 0F 88 00 FE MCS Uplink v2 5 Meee 09 a 07 a 05 03 amp 0 1 2011 08 08 01 35 2011 08 08 14 05 2011 08 09 02 35 2011 08 09 15 05 un MZ Ava BI ua su 00 12 0F 88 00 FE RSSI Uplink Export to XLS H gt o2 Figure 5 5 Split View 5 4 3 Element Browsing Options The Elements group in the Browser displays the elements as a list marked with a mini icon and a gt symbol If there are too many items in the current level the Browser automatically groups them Therefore the elements in the main part of the display and in the Ele
204. ierarchy should be displayed below the current measurements submenu Single select entry If this option is set to Yes E Under the Equipment search the equipment will be immediately displayed if the search has a single result only M Under the current measurements menu item the page for a piece of equipment will be displayed immediately if the user has the rights for a single piece of equipment only E The elements of a site will also be displayed if only a single site can be accessed StarQuality User Manual Chapter 9 General Setting Options Setting Preferences Table 9 4 User Preferences Continued Item Description Starting page Select the page to be displayed upon login E Empty E Alarms ROOT HM Measurements Search HM Measurements ROOT Measurement page info Select the way to display information about measurements E Long description E Short description Chart order on actual result page Select whether and in what order the public and or private charts should be displayed on the Measurement page accessed through the current Measurements menu item Alarm refresh Select the refreshing interval when displaying alarms in real time mode Alarm window If viewing the alarms in real time mode select if to display only the current alarms or also the alarms from the past time interval Equip actual results chart time span Select the resolution and au
205. iguration 2 Click the site icon to enter the site 3 Click edit next to the equipment you wish to configure 4 Fill in the Delay sec parameter with the desired value 5 Click OK Setting the Timeout and Retry Parameters for 4Motion TFTP For 4Motion TFTP devices you may set generic timeout and retry parameters for importing the performance collection files The Retry parameter indicates for how many times StarQuality reattempts to import the file in case of failure after the initial attempt a value of 3 means 1 try and maximum 3 retries for a maximum total of 4 attempts The Timeout parameter indicates for how many seconds to wait between consecutive retries These parameters are set in the CONF G_ N pm file E swIMAX 4Motion TFTP INTERVAL Timeout interval in seconds The default value is 80 E swIMAX 4Motion TFTP RETRY Number of retries The default value is 3 The parameters above are generic If you set different timeout and retries values for specific base stations from their corresponding edit screens these values override the settings in the CONF G_ N pm file 4Motion Version Management StarQuality may be configured to support specific 4Motion versions 2 5 3 0 3 0M and 3 5 Each version is enabled disabled in StarQuality based on a parameter stored in the CONFIG_IN om file in optstarquality etc The following parameters apply BR swIMAX KEEP XML FILES 1 M swIMAX 16E VERSIONS 25 1 For 4Motion 2 5 default value 1 St
206. ing check boxes 11 Scroll down and click OK to implement changes StarQuality User Manual Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site ke To add an Oracle database server 1 Make sure the following prerequisites are available Setup and configuration Network connection between StarQuality and Oracle machines Information Oracle TNS name in case StarQuality and Oracle are on the same machine Oracle server TNS in case StarQuality and Oracle are on separate machines Oracle client TNS TNS name is defined in the file fnsnames ora placed in the directory ORACLE_HOME NETWORK ADMIN Password of Oracle SYSTEM user 2 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 3 Click the Server Health icon to enter its site 4 From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipment from Template 5 Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup Default Oracle 6 Click OK A basic setup template page is displayed Template name Default Orade Equipment name H Equipment description Connection 5 User system Password 7 i Right Normal x Timeout sec Retries Default measurement is min E interval ad Choose an icon E icon_equip png v Timeout sec Configured Add immediately to job queue OK Cancel Figure 4 9 Default Oracle Template StarQuality User Manual Se amp Ss 145 Chapter
207. ingw core gcc mingw g grep gzip ess ibbz2 1 libdb4 5 ibexpat1 ibexpat1 devel libgdbm4 ibiconv2 ibintl3 libintl8 ibncurses8 ibpcreO libpopto ibreadline6 ibwrapO login make mingw runtime minires openssh openssl perl version 5 8 x x ping sed tar termcap terminfo texinfo tzcode vim w32api StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks which zlib OR From Alvarion FTP server Download the CygwinFromWwwGoh4Ccom zjp file from ftp downloads alvarion com StarSuite Star Quality Installations Username and password are required when connecting as an Alvarion customer 2 Extract the zip file into a folder with a path that does not include spaces 3 From the extracted files run the setup exe file The Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window is displayed Cygwin Setup To EN Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This setup program is used for the initial installation of the Cygwin environment as well as all subsequent updates Make sure to remember where you saved it The pages that follow will guide you through the installation Please note that Cygwin consists of a large number of packages spanning wide variety of purposes We only install base set of packages by default You can always run this program at any time in the future to add remove or upgrade packages as necessary E Setup exe version 2 573 2 3 Copyright 2000 2007 http vw cpgwin com Cancel Fi
208. ion Downlink Y Y Y Y Uplink 2 Uplink HARQ Packet Error Rate Uplink Y Y Y Y from 3 0M 3 5 name changed to UL Dropped HARQ sub bursts 3 SINR Distribution Downlink Uplink 4 Air Link Utilization 5 MAP Size Distribution 6 Retransmission Downlink 7 Noise Floor Uplink 00 Throughput 2 5 name was Average Sector Throughput 9 Average Backhaul Traffic 10 Active MS Idle MS Registered MS 11 Active idle MSs out of registered zl z z i lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt z lt z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Z lt lt z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Z lt lt z lt lt I lt lt lt lt lt 12 Active MS Idle MS Ratio StarQuality User Manual E SS Gi Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management Table 11 6 4Motion KPIs Per Firmware Version Continued KPI Name in StarQuality 2 5M2 3 0 3 0M 3 5 Comments 13 MS Registration N Y Y Y 14 MS Registration Ratio N Y nd Y 15 MS Registration Service Flows N N Y Y 16 BS Traffic Type N Y N Y 17 Burst Error Rate Downlink N Y Y Y Uplink N Y Y Y 18 Burst Error Rate Ratio Downlink N Y Y Y Uplink N Y Y Y 19 MS Hand Over N Y Yy Y 20 MS Hand Over Ratio N Y Y Y 21 Spectral Efficiency of all MS Y Y Y Y from 3 0M 3 5 name changed to Spectral Efficiency 22 Average Provisioned Downlink N Y Y Y Uplink N Y Y Y 23 MIR CIR P
209. ion starts To view detailed information click Show Details You can copy the content of the details view for reference ES starQuality Setup Els Installing Please wait while StarQuality is being installed Execute setup exe q R C starquality Extract vim 7 1 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin mininstall from releaselw32api Extract w32api 3 11 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installlcygwin minlinstall from releasefwhich Extract which 2 19 1 tar bz2 Output folder C starquality _install cygwin_min install_From release zlib Extract zlib 1 2 3 2 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality _install Cygwin Install Output folder C starquality _install cygwin_min Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Je Execute setup exe q R C starquality Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 13 StarQuality Installing The last page indicates that the basic installation is complete StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 22 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Fs 3 StarQuality basic installation complete Press Next to continue with the remaining installation steps Completed Apache stopped Add Firewall port StarQuality WEB TCP 80 Wed Nov 5 17 24 27 2008 alert httpd Could not determine the server s fully qual Apache is running Configuring StarQuali
210. is valid see Step 3 and 4 below Level The possible threshold values in decreasing severity levels Critical red background Major orange background Warning yellow background Minor cyan background Type Not applicable E mail The e mail address es to which the application should send a message if there is threshold violation Select one or more e mail addresses by highlighting and using the CTRL and Shift keys the required address es from the predefined list refer to Setting E mail Addresses Admin only on page 251 Do deselect an address press CTRL and click the entry StarQuality User Manual Se E O Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates A prerequisite for the actual e mail notifications is activating the SMTP server see Northbound Interface NBI on page 268 SNMP Trap The list of addresses where the system should send SNMP traps in case of threshold violation The addresses should be separated by commas There are two basic options for address I IP address only The trap is sent with the default credentials of public community and port 162 2 According to the following format community computer name or ip port Command Not applicable Continuous alert H selected at each violation the appropriate e mail and or SNMP trap is sent If not selected this will be done only if there was no violation du
211. isplayed when selecting Reports from the main menu Table 3 3 Reports Item Description See also Items in the submenu panel On demand report setting a new report Working with On Demand Reports on page 213 Bulk export wizard Exporting reports to Excel Exporting Data from the StarQuality Database on page 224 Direct links to the built in reports Oracle data API Application Program Interface for bulk export of large amounts of data by selection of chosen NEs date range and KPIs on page 205 Items in the Browser Calendar The reports are displayed according to the time interval selected in the calendar Settings Appear only when displaying Setting the Report Range and reports include Display on page 222 E Type HM Show date column 3 3 4 Settings For each item in the submenu panel different items appear in the Browser depending on the access rights of the user The following items appear in the submenu panel when selecting Settings from the main menu Table 3 4 Settings Item Description See also Search Searching the configured Searching Objects on objects based on page 130 sites equipment names Site and equipment Configuring basic and virtual Site and Equipment configuration sites and equipment objects Configuration on page 233 StarQuality User Manual O di Chapter 3 Getting Started Table 3 4 Se
212. ity QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace file IC ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ DATA dbf QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes INFO Oracle tablespace SQ DATA created QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user name SQ QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user password INFO Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes INFO Oracle user SQ created 2 6 2 7 Finishing the Installation I The installer generates the schematic maps and exits INFO Redrawing schematic maps INFO Installer ended bash 3 00 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Running StarQuality on Solaris on page 108 Configuration Parameters on page 109 StarQuality User Manual Se 8 Dud 2 7 1 2 7 1 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Installation on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system This installation type involves configuration of the Solaris kernel parameters and the installation of the following components M Oracle server on separate machine E Oracle client on the StarQuality machine BW StarQ
213. ity Licence Obtain a licence file from the administrator and To load a licence I Place the licence file on the computer from which you activated the client 2 From Settings select Servers gt Licenses The Licences Configuration window is displayed 3 Click Add new and browse for the file containing the license 4 Click OK A list detailing the licenses is displayed 5 Verify that none of the entries in the license list are colored red 6 Press Ctrl C on the keyboard 7 Press Enter Running StarQuality on Windows To start the server following initial installation I Open a Cygwin shell and enter the command by default it is not required to start it manually usr sbin apachectl start INFORMATION If the Apache server is started this way the Cygwin shell should remain open Closing it will cause the Apache service to shut down 2 Open a web browser and go to http lt ip or hostname gt The StarQuality opening window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZE Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Running StarQuality on Windows StarQuality Login Pwd ox Version 3 5 Figure 2 68 Login Window 3 Enter the User Name and Password The default admin users credentials are User Name admin Password admin123 The StarQuality opening window is displayed for a few seconds and then the main interface window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Ge O amp
214. ity User Manual 11 5 5 ASN GW KPIs Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 8 4Motion ASN GW KPIs ASN GW KPIs KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description Average Backhaul Traffic Bits E 2 5M2 cntNpuBckhiPort 4NT5 Average data throughput user IP er Second kets i h th link SS E 3 0 cntNpuBearer HANTT Fe en a E 30M uplink direction including backhaul E E cntNpuCascPort 4NT4 bearer external management internal chinpuBaivgint HANT2 management and cascading cntNpulntMgmt 4NT3 Authentication Reject Ratio 3 0 Authentication Reject Ratio 4NTh Ratio of auth Rejection in respect of ge fy ae ful INE E 3 0M Authentication Rejections HANTO mn E MS Registration Count E 30 Successful Initial NE 4NTm also 4022 for BTS Number of failed successful initial network entry attempts E 3 0M Failed Initial NE 4NTn also 4023 for BTS di EE H 35 i Min Registered MSs 4NT Max Registered MSs 4NTk Registered MSs Qty HANTI also 4019 for BTS MS Registration Service Flows E 30 Created Service Flows Qty 4NTp also 4025 for BTS Number of created service flows Count E 30M during MS registration E NE failure Ratio E 3 0 NE failure Ratio HANTG Ratio of failed INE in respect to E 3 0M successful INE E StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 8 4Motion ASN GW KPIs Continued ASN GW KP
215. lay OPS eege 163 5 5 3 Chart E di 165 5 6 Searching Measurements ebessen 167 5 7 Saving Items as SUDMENUS 2 Ee eege cee eects Ee 170 5 8 Setting Trendlin s to Graphs egenen SEAN 171 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 174 6 1 BI KE TN NE SE 175 6 2 Creating and Editing Threshold Templates arnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnennnn 176 6 3 Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates rannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenr 182 6 4 Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates ENNEN REENEN REENEN EEN 183 6 5 Assigning Threshold Templates to EquipmentS x xnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenr 185 6 6 Editing Thresholds va 44242 188 6 6 1 Editing an Existing Threshold Template 188 6 6 2 Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change 190 6 7 Generating the Expression Using Input FieldS nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenennn 191 Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring arararannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 194 7 1 VOT VI eege 195 7 2 Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennn 197 7 2 1 Viewing Alarms by Time er dee 197 StarQuality User Manual SE Contents 7 2 2 Alarm Display Options ss ssssssssssssnssnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunnana 197 7 2 3 TE Alarms EE 201 7 3 Downloading Data to Excel Files ssusnn
216. lect Packages ls Ea Select Packages Select packages to install E C Keep C Prey Ze Cure C Exp View Category CO Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install Interpreters 43 Install Libs 43 Install Math 43 Install Net 4 Install EI Perl 4 Install 47 5 8 8 4 nja 9 972k perl Python 4 Install Perl Version s JV Hide obsolete packages Ss Figure 2 7 Select Packages Window Perl Version 12 Click Next The installation procees starts 47 Cygwin Setup Progress This page displays the progress of the download or installation Lg Installing libdb4 5 4 5 20 2 2 Husr bin cygbz2 1 dll Progress gg Total EEE Disk md Figure 2 8 Cygwin Installation Process 13 Click Finish StarQuality User Manual D Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality Cygwin Setup Installation Status and Create Icons jo Create Icons gt Tell setup if you want it to create a few icons for convenient access to the Cygwin environment IV Create icon on Desktop JV Add icon to Start Menu Installation Status Installation Complete Figure 2 9 Cygwin Installation Completion 2 2 2 Installing StarQuality 2 2 2 1 Overview This Installation type is applicable when installing StarQuality on Windows server with internal Oracle database refer to Table 2 1 The installation must be performed by a local administrator user During th
217. lection Restart data collection Delete Remove inactive equipment from the StarQuality database Delete empty parent objects active when selecting the Delete option If as a result of a deletion a parent object remains empty it is deleted as well The empty parent deletion propagates upward through the hierarchy if the parent s parent is now empty it is also deleted and so forth StarQuality User Manual Sei amp 242 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations 3 Use the Server Group drop down menu to select the server group of equipments to search 4 Click Search The equipment or measurements that match your search criteria are listed below the search box Search Options Activate data collection C Delete IT Delete empty parent objects Server group WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP LI Type Name D Equipment 13_15FDD Figure 9 12 Inactive Equipment Deletion Confirmation 5 From the list either select the first check box to mark all the list items for deletion reactivation or select individual items by selecting the corresponding check boxes 6 Click Confirmation link at the upper left part of the page active if you selected at least one equipment A confirmation page is displayed listing the equipment to be activated or deleted Search gt Confirmation Prev Type Name Equipment 13_15FDD Activate data collection Figure 9 13 Inactive Equipment Deletion Confirmation 7 To
218. lection Gap Filling StarQuality enables manual initiation of compensating for data collection gaps in 4Motion The scope for gap filling is Previous 24 hours only Unlimited number of BTSs Examples of causes for collection gaps that can be filled using this mechanism StarQuality was inactive No communication between StarQuality and BTS Examples of cases for which the mechanism will not perform gap filling BTS was inactive BTS PM collection was disabled or partial NOTE e The results added by the gap filling mechanism are available for display and bulk export but do not H initiate threshold violations and will not be taken into account for StarQuality built in reports gt To fill up 4Motion collection gaps I From Settings select Site and equipment configuration gt Fill WiMAX 4Motion collection gaps The standard Search window is displayed A Fill in the search criteria For searching the whole network type in the Search field and edit the number of entries accordingly 3 Click OK A list of results is displayed showing the matching BTSs 4 Use the check boxes to select the BTSs in which to search for gaps within the last 24 hours For the whole network select the upper check box StarQuality User Manual Se E De 245 Chapter 9 General Setting Options 4Motion Data Collection Gap Filling P Browser Site and equipment confi 4 01 Site and equipment configuration 02 Scheduled confi
219. lements prompts to confirm the action before it is executed Modify an object Click edit and modify the Click OK or Cancel parameters Create a new simple object Click add new Create objects based on a template Click from template Create objects based on another Click copy from object Perform other editing operations Use the pull down menu Applicable in case of available on the screen normal and virtual sites StarQuality User Manual Se amp 129 Chapter 3 Getting Started Searching Objects 3 7 Searching Objects Searching is done only by names of sites and equipment Under the Settings gt Search menu item you can search the stored objects in the system This menu Is only accessible to the administrator and restricted administrator users There are two search interfaces available simple and advanced The simple interface requires typing in your search rules while the advanced interface uses graphical controls You can toggle between them by clicking on Simple Search and Advanced Search respectively To start searching for an object Specify a searching string using one of the following methods I Simple search type the string directly in the input field and click OK 2 Click Advanced Search an advanced window is displayed which facilitates the construction of the searching string and contains the following insert fields Table 3 7 Advanced Search Criteria Criterion Description Search
220. lity different users can have different access rights to various objects The administrator user admin has the highest permission level The user groups are Table 1 1 User Levels and Permissions Level Administrators Users Type admin User Administrator Restricted Normal Limited Default password admin123 N A N A N A N A Tasks Create modify and view v v objects according to privileges Change password S o 7 Create modify and delete p g v only those R administrator users created by them Create modify and delete z Y limited by i servers or server groups User Admin View entries in audit log v Z v only those created by them View the operating system 7 7 7 7 level user password on some computers Change and view the licenses v x S 7 7 used Set preferences S T Y g Create a private virtual v 7 i hierarchy and charts Modify templates reports except the servers events and maps exclusion windows For further information refer to the Managing Licences on page 257 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation In this chapter Introduction on page 7 Installation on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database on page 13 Installation on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 30 Installation on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separ
221. lity machine must be available To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sq p us utility as follows a Switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user b Enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme assuming that the database SID is testme and the system password is oracle If the SQL prompt is displayed connectivity to the database server is confirmed Report any error message the database administrator StarQuality User Manual Se amp oa Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks c Enter exit Windows or quit Solaris to complete the procedure M The following Oracle database information must be available when installing the StarQuality Oracle Database server IP Service name or Service ID TNS Password for SYSTEM user 2 4 1 3 Installing Cygwin Cygwin is a UNIX like environment for Windows Always use the cygwin application to run StarQuality commands You can download the Cygwin Installation files from the Alvarion FTP Server or from the internet ke To install Cygwin I Download Cygwin files From the internet Make sure the Cygwin version you download includes the following packages Sapache base files base passwd bash binutils bzip2 coreutils crypt cygrunsrv cygutils cygwin editrights expat findutils gawk gcc core gcc g gcc mingw core gcc mingw g g
222. ll other fields with their default values 8 Click OK Discovery is running and can take up a few minutes The following window is displayed Red fields indicate that collection is not activated by default StarQuality User Manual Se E 149 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Name 216 IP address 172 30 105 216 User dadmin Password idadmin Server group No server group definied Server Previous server Collect data Yes Keep collected 255 data for days Default measurement z 15 min interval Created by admin Created when 2009 03 01 14 21 15 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 03 01 14 21 15 Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Measurement type Index Name Interval Disc free space Disc free space 15 min Disc usage l I Disc usage 15 min Disc free space Idevifd dev fe Disc free space 15 min Disc usage Idevifd dev fd Disc usage 15 min Disc free space devices device Disc free space 15 min Disc usage devices Jeunes Disc usage 15 min Figure 4 14 Network Discovery Results Unix Linux 9 Tostart collecting select from the Operations drop down menu Modify Equipment The following window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Parent site SERVER HEALTH z Name 216 Description IP address 172 30 105 216 User dadmin Password idsdmn Keep collected
223. lt in Reports Table 11 5 BreezeACCESS VL SU Performance KPIs Continued KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Noise Floor dBm Noise Floor HVNF The average Noise Floor recorded by the unit Retransmission Retransmission HVRSU The percentage of total number of retransmissions including all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions out of the total number of unicast frames transmitted over the wireless port Downlink RSSI dBm RSSI HVRSS Downlink RSSI value as measured in the time of sampling Downlink SNR dB SNR HVSNR Downlink SNR value as measured at the time of sampling Throughput bits per second Throughput HVTHR Sector throughput as measured at the time of sampling Uptime hours Uptime HVUPT CPE uptime in hours Wireless Frames frames per second Wireless Frames VWF The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames including control and wireless management frames 11 4 4 Default Built in Reports BW BottomN Uptime M TopN Throughput BR TopN Number of Connected SUs StarQuality User Manual Ee 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion 4Motion Network Discovery Prerequisites BR PM TM Collection Content
224. m contains free of charge third party Java Perl and NSIS software libraries as well a Cygwin running environment The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be Found in the third party directory on the installer CD By clicking I Agree you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT the Agreement READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE vi IF you accept the terms of the agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install StarQuality N Nullsoft Install System vz 4 lt Back Ge Figure 2 55 Licence Agreement 5 Click I Agree The wizard displays components to install StarQuality User Manual amp 3 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks ES StarQuality Setup Pie E Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue Choose Components Choose which features of StarQuality you want to install Description Position your mouse er component to see its description Select components to install Space required 185 6MB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 56 Choose Components 6 Click Next The StarQuality installation starts To view detailed information click Show Details You can copy the content of the
225. me Report Name the report to be sent by e mail Bar type the initial value shown on the Report page for this report view The valid values are Table only No bar presentation Grouped Sub columns belonging to the same column are unified Separated Sub columns are not unified 9 Order by Sub columns are unified however the column used for sorting the table remains separated Show date column Display the dates for minimum and maximum values Object type Site or Virtual Site Object Equipment or server E mail type HTML or XLS format E mail Text used as the sender name for all outgoing e mail messages Run cycle The frequency by which to send the report daily weekly monthly E mail content prefix Free text as the prologue of every e mail message E mail content postfix Free text as the epilogue of every e mail message 3 Click OK An e mail message will be sent to all recipients on a regular basis according to your settings StarQuality User Manual Se amp Za 220 Chapter 8 Reports Viewing Reports 8 5 Viewing Reports Select Reports from the main menu to display available reports The reports appear about an hour after defining the variables Alarms RTS E Measurements 16 TDD TopN AirLink Occupation Reports FF Reports 19 DD TopN Throughput b Settings 22 VL TopN Throughput I Browser TDD TopN Air Link Utiliza 4 lob Ofn aus zl 8 sen FEE 12
226. ments WiMAX Equipment Measurements 5 2 WiMAX Equipment Measurements KPIs Key Performance Indicators exist for three types of entities M Slot also referred to as AU sector BS M SU also referred to as MS CPE M NPU also referred to as BTS in common measurements For specific device information refer to Chapter 11 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Measurements Browsing Options 5 3 Measurements Browsing Options You can find a specific device data using three methods M Navigating the path from the Measurement menu click ROOT or Network Monitored SUs sites and then click the equipment icons M Searching for a specific equipment see Searching Measurements on page 167 M Creating a specific sub menu as a shortcut see Saving Items as Submenus on page 170 StarQuality User Manual Se amp D Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Measurements Display Options 5 4 Measurements Display Options 5 4 1 Viewing Options Click one of the icons in the View group to set the element display options in the View group Figure 5 13 Table 5 1 Element View Options Icon Tooltip Description Icons The elements of the hierarchy level under the selected item appear with a Boo big icon and name up to 5 items in a row as in Figure 5 1 Click on the icons to continue the navigation List The elements appear with a small icon and name thus allowing many objects on
227. ments group of the Browser pane are not necessarily corresponding To browse elements Do one of the following M Click on the name of the object to continue the navigation on the left side M Click on the symbol to browse to the selected site or equipment The elements under the selected equipment also appear in the currently active tab M Incase of many equipments click on a group to expand it The system stays at the same level so clicking does not mean a hierarchy level has changed E Click Measurement Types to navigate the hierarchy and display only the elements that include the selected measurement type StarQuality User Manual AS amp Q Q Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Operations Drop Down Menu Options 5 4 4 Operations Drop Down Menu Options The following functions are available for viewing measurement data see Figure 5 6 Print page Show history Show links Logical BS history SU 00 12 CF 89 6 1 DE MCS Downlink Go to alarms Go to configuration Save as submenu Virtual equipment modification Bit Bin Figure 5 6 Measurements Operation drop down Menu E Print Page sends the page to printer M Show history the application tracks the navigation of the user in the Measurements and in the Alarms menu and builds a history log from it Each tab has its own log and each log entry contains the visited object along with the used submenu and the selected date and time period You c
228. mpling interval of 15 minutes Total Available Slots Total Available Slots eBSi Total number of applicable slots in air link frames during the measured period Transfer Ratio Transfer Ratio eBSa Ratio between aggregated CPE Total Bursts to aggregated CPE Total and Dropped Bursts Transfer Overhead Transfer overhead eBSd Ratio between aggregated CPE HARQ NACKs to aggregated CPE HARQ ACKs Uptime Uptime eUPT Time since last system boot in hours StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 10 Extreme BTS KPls Continued Extreme MS KPIs KPI Measurement Name Code for Description Threshold and API Used Slots Used Slots HeBSj Total number of used slots in air link frames during the measured period 11 5 11 Extreme MS KPIs Table 11 11 Extreme SU KPls KPI Measurement Name Code for Threshold and API Descripton SU CIR Allocated Bits per Second SU CIR Allocated eSUe Aggregation of maximum provisioned traffic of CIR services for each CPE during the 15 minutes period Su Drop Ratio SU Drop Ratio eSUb Ratio between number of dropped bursts and total bursts dropped and succeeded for each CPE counted in the sampled period SU MIR Allocated Bits per Second SU MIR Allocated HeSUf Aggregation of maximum provisioned traffic of MIR services for each CPE during the 15 minutes period Rate Downlink U
229. n to the original values after the import Full process Apply all the changes after the import 4 Click Import The report is added to the reports list INFORMATION If a report view or variable already exist in the destination system StarQuality updates those instances except the report interval variable StarQuality User Manual Chapter 8 Reports Scheduling Report Delivery 8 4 Scheduling Report Delivery You can send reports by e mail on periodically using a fixed schedule This section describes how to configure this schedule gt To schedule a report delivery 1 From the Settings menu select Reports gt Scheduled Report The Scheduled Report Configuration window is displayed Browser Reports a Es 01 Report variables 02 Report views 03 Report export 04 Report import Name Scheduled report configuration 05 Scheduled reports ye 06 Scheduled equipment send Report name 4Motion BottomN Uptime wd Bar type Tabe ony Show date column T Object type Site X Object fr E E mail type Hrm 3 E mail Run cycle week 3 E mail content prefix lal of E E mail content postfix Figure 8 17 Scheduled Report Configuration StarQuality User Manual Se amp D Chapter 8 Reports Scheduling Report Delivery 2 Enter the following information Name Free text for the task na
230. nce prf_3008_201109010730 xml gz Figure 9 21 Collection Filling Progress StarQuality User Manual Se D D 9 3 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Customization Customization In the Customization menu item you can make user specific settings non administrator users and system level settings admin users The following settings are available from the browser M Public charts Not applicable Configuring charts Admin only M Public menu items Admin only Not applicable Adding menu items to the Measurement and Alarms pages Admin only E Creating External Links Not applicable Connect the StarQuality to any WEB based application or to a WEB page e g equipment documentation E Preferences Setting display options and user preferences E Setting E mail Addresses Admin only Setting an e mail address to which the system can send notifications on threshold violations NOTE Some of the items in the browser are not applicable therefore are not described 9 3 1 Setting Preferences You can define and configure display options and various GUI behavior using the Customization window To set preferences I From Settings select Customization gt Preferences The Preferences window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp De 248 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Setting Preferences gt Alarms a Measurements Report
231. nd Reports 2 Enter a new name for the report view 3 Select the report name to base the new report view from the drop down list 4 Click OK 5 Edit the new report as described above 8 23 Working with On Demand Reports By using the On demand reports the system creates and generates reports referring to data already existing in the database It is recommended to specify limited amount of data for the report as processing large amounts of data may cause system overload The On demand reports are generated on 15 minute granulation data samples only by default 1 month back gt To create an On Demand report I From the Reports menu select On Demand Reports The On demand selection path and settings window is displayed The items in the selection path become available as you specify the settings Selection SE sons E l l Text vish 1 th 1 G Equpmentievel pa 7 8 9 a0 n aa as Report type messenent eve 415 16 7 18 19 a F Group measurements together 21 22 23 er When Tien step Figure 8 8 On demand Reports Types In the Report Type section choose either 0 By Equipment Level By Measurement In this case select wether to group measurements together When Which time period is used for the report 2 Click Search in the selection path the Search settings window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 213 Chapter 8 Reports Working with On Demand Reports P Bro
232. ne with Oracle Database on a separate machine Before installation refer to Table 2 1 below to determine which type of installation to use StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Table 2 1 Selecting Installation Types Installation Types Operating system System architecture Installation Sources Oracle database server version Oracle client version installed on StarQuality machine Refer to Windows 2008 Standard R2 Internal database E Cygwin Oracle SW and patch supplied with the No Oracle client required Installation on Windows 2008 R2 E StarQuality ISO StarQuality DVD Windows Server with only Internal Oracle Database on page 13 External databaseon BW Cygwin E For R2 Version supplied with the Installation on same machine E StarQuality exe StarQuality DVD Windows Server with E For 2008 Standard External Oracle E Oracle Server Installation 10203 vista w2Kk8 x86 production db Database on the Same Machine on page 30 External database on M Cygwin Consult the Oracle definitions for the 10203 vista w2k8 x86 Installation on a separate machine E Oracle Server Installation machine and OS used for Oracle server production client Windows Server with M Oracle Client installation DR pe vik same version as server Separate Machine on E StarQuality exe panne StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality In
233. nnn nnen nnne nenn 13 Table 2 4 Oracle Connection Parameters rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnannnnnnanenen 26 Table 2 5 Network POrts siiciicesescnssistssinasistaunnnatennieiiebaienwatansiens aeaa KV EnaA KIETEN EKEK EDENE 31 Table 2 6 Oracle Connection Parameters sskkvgkeNbUSRENEESNEENENEREEREERRESEEERENERESSEN ENER KENENEUSRSEN ENEE seen 45 Table 2 7 Network POINTS ssssssssssssssusnnnsunrnurnnnnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnennnnnun nnen n nennen 49 Table 2 8 Oracle Connection Parameters r rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannnennannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnanannnnanunen 60 Table 2 9 Network PONS snici crsce sieatidecatatnutanstavads tous ienencedametauenancnaaratausbebensuiatausunte hous muteanedndomuenne 64 Table 2 10 NEMO PONS see 71 Table2 11 Network POTTS eessen 79 Table 2412 Network PA EE 87 Table 2 13 Network POT eege ee Eege 96 Table TAN 122 Table 3 2 EST ee ue vetcnnataws baxeiuedcnapuneanawewe van nncedanaus pase cuananananeiebenoenmaneuacannbanes 123 TENNE 124 Table SE 124 Table 3 5 Setting the Tab Display Opti0ns sum mesmmerseenseeissnienpnaiievadjnnnenpanenknnkkengn naa knnnbdkevddan senk 128 Table 3 6 Editing NES sjark nrnna mennene 129 Table 3 7 Advanced Search Criteria s sssssssssunnssrunrrnrnnrrunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunne bd 130 Table 5 1 Element View OptiONS ssssssssssrnsssunnsnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
234. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn dE 158 Table 5 2 Tame Sai Ke 163 Table 5 3 Chart Display Mare EE 163 StarQuality User Manual Tables Table 6 1 Threshold Name Examples epes eege Ee Eege EEN EE 178 Table 7 1 Using the Alarms E 195 Table 7 2 Time Span OPS EE 197 Table 7 3 Alarms View E 197 Table 7 4 TET UG EE 201 Table 8 1 Navigating Reports sis rcnsscatctetenspoadicnntvcnsmasnnacenanustie sayianebienskeaiesnnetieteadtonsanciendusdvncasapeneens 221 Table 9 1 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration s sssssssssssssensnrsnrrnnnnnrenrnne 234 Table 9 2 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 Table 9 3 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration rrrnvnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 237 Table 9 4 User Preferences Jada 249 Table 10 1 Configuring SMTP Connection KSERENEEERESEERNKSEREEAEEEENKSKNESNNSENEEEENESEANRNEEAEECNEREREE EES 270 Table 11 1 BTS Configuration Requirements REENEN ENNEN 277 Table 1122 FDD and TDD Traffic BS KPIS siiscasetesassnncdannenastantncdancendanaehpaueccods EAR ENEE 278 Table 11 3 FDD TDD SU Performance KPIs File Collection A 281 Table 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic KPIS stiiecccsscsncssiccnsncaesincnanenncenanenannagecncbnenechsninonsUansrennmeansnaue 284 Table 11 5 BreezeACCESS VL SU Performance KPIS rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnen 289 Table 11 6 4Motion KPIs Per Firmware Version EEN REENE
235. ns on the screen login root Password Last login Mon May 11 16 18 25 from 172 3 1 5 112 Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 16 Generic January 2005 You have new mail hash 3 it cd opt starquality bash 3 66 UninstallStarQuality INFO Command line parameters INFO Uninstaller started INFO LOG file tmp starquality install log INFO Checking perl version INFO Found perl usr bin perl INFO Checking OS type INFO OS Solaris_x86 INFO Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality INFO Done INFO Using the following values INFO OS user starg OS home directory opt starquality StarQuality directory opt starquality fire these values correct lt Y N gt Y Searching for running StarQuality modules Do you want to drop the Oracle user SQ lt Y N gt N y The OS user of Oracle oracle oracle Found Oracle home export home orac le oracle product 1 2 db 1 ORACLE HOME environment variable export home orac le oracle product 11 Checking the Oracle home export home oracle oracle product 1 2 db Oracle home export home oracle oracle product 1 2 db 1 seems to bh Checking Oracle version Found Oracle version 1 Detected 32 bit Oracle Oracle SYSTEM user password 1 Confirm the password If you drop the Oracle user SO then your measurement data will be gon Are you sure that you want to drop Oracle user SQ Y N N y Dropping the Oracle user Q this could tak
236. nstaller generates the schematic maps and exits INFO Redrawing schematic maps INFO Installer ended 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Configuration Parameters on page 109 StarQuality User Manual Se amp D eo Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation on Linux Server with Oracle Database ona Separate 2 9 Installation on Linux Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system This installation type involves configuration of the Linux kernel parameters and the installation of the following components M Oracle server on a separate machine E Oracle client on the StarQuality machine BW StarQuality 2 9 1 Pre installation Tasks 2 9 1 1 Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements Table 2 13 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed equipment 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE App server managed equipment and 162 SNMP Outbound towards other NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed equipment 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client server As installed From StarQuality to Oracle Defa
237. nt both CONF and DATA tablespaces to the Oracle data computer partition according to Table 2 2 Disk Allocation 14 Review the creation of CONF and DATA tablespaces If you selected the External Oracle database option the Data tablespace size default is 2000M and you can increase it to up to 4000M StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle tablespace parameters Conf tablespace 5Q CONF File CHORACLEIPRODUCTI 10 2 DORADATALORCLI5Q CONF dbf Size 300M Data tablespace 5Q DATA File CJORACLEIPRODUCT110 2 OJORADATAJORCLISQ DATA dbf Size 10000M Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 42 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameters 15 Click Next The Oracle user parameters are is displayed You can change and confirm the password M StarQuality Setup Pie E 9 User name 5Q User password oe Confirm password eg Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle user parameters Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 43 Oracle Connection User Parameters 16 Click Next The Setup wizard is displayed prompting that the installation is complete StarQuality User Manual amp a Q Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 8 StarQuality Setup TE Completing the StarQuality Setup Wizard StarQuality has been installed on your comput
238. o Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 5 1 below This installation type involves configuration of the Solaris kernel parameters and then installation of StarQuality The required steps are 1 Configure Kernel Parameters for Solaris x86 Section 2 5 1 1 2 Configure network ports Section 2 5 1 2 3 Install StarQuality Section 2 5 2 4 Run StarQuality Section 2 10 3 Pre installation Tasks Configuring Kernel Parameters for Solaris x86 1 Add the following entries to the etc4System file and reboot the system set shmsys shminfo_shmmax 4294967295 set shmsys shminfo_shmmni 100 set semsys seminfo_semmni 100 set semsys seminfo semmsl 256 2 Verify that there is a minimum of 10 GB swap space Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements StarQuality User Manual Se amp D 63 2 5 2 2 5 2 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality Table 2 9 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed equipment 162 SNMP Outbound towards and other NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outb
239. o average in dB m 30 SINR Avg ASU3 per the number of sampled bursts E 3 0M SINR Avg FFR Reuse 3 HASUI me SINR Avg MIMO B 4SUs SINR Max 4SU2 SINR Max FFR Reuse 3 4SUr SINR Max MIMO B 4SUu SINR Min 4SU1 SINR Min FFR Reuse 3 4SUq SINR Min MIMO B HASUt Throughput Ratio E 3 0 MS MIMO A Ratio HASUC E 3 0M MS MIMO B Ratio 4SUd ode MS BF Ratio 4SUe Total Transferred Bursts H 3 0 Total Transferred Bursts 4SUb StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information BreezeMAX Extreme 11 5 7 BreezeMAX Extreme 11 5 8 Overview mM SW Compatibility version 1 5 E Collector type WiMAX Extreme BR mMulti version support is not implemented for Extreme Therefore there might be some empty graphs if the running version is 1 5 since some of the KPIs are only applicable in ver 1 7 1 8 11 5 9 Network Discovery Prerequisites Optional registered as Authorized manager with traps disabled according to BreezeMAX Extreme specifications 11 5 10 Extreme BTS KPIs Table 11 10 Extreme BTS KPIs KPI Measurement Name Code for Description Threshold and API Air Link Free Ratio Air Link Free Ratio eBSl Air link free unused i e potential ratio in in DL UL direction during measured period 100 DL UL Occupation ratio Air Link Occupation Ratio Air Link Occupation Ratio eBSk Air link occupation ratio in in DL UL direction during the measured period CIR Alloc
240. odification NEEN 190 Figure 6 14 Threshold Conh urahon uaemmsimngo nine cebsticnns shdnpbsinuetietandenaenassennsinel 191 Figure 7 1 Alarms Summary at the Top Right Corner of the Wimdoww 195 Figure 7 2 Table View of et ee kerk enke 195 Figure 7 3 Detailed Alarm Troes Eegbee Eeer EEAE E bebes 196 Eenegung 198 Figure 7 5 List View Of AES 199 Figure 7 6 Detailed View of NET eege Eeer Eege E 199 Figure 7 7 The Equipment Level View of Alarms uk REENEN RENE 200 Figure 7 8 Chart View of lege eebe EE Eege 201 Figure 7 9 Sample XLS of Alarm Table wicicccescsticcndanensnscntenennnndasdanetonsndnnabdvensbabssuontaneessnaxkanandnetnne 202 Figure 7 10 Sample XLS File of Chart Data sssssssssesnnesurnnnrnnnrnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 203 Figure 8 1 Report Variables Window Examplel AANEREN 206 Figure 8 2 Adding a New Report Variable rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 207 Figure 8 3 Report View Configuration Window Iexamplel AANEREN 209 Figure 8 4 Creating a New Report VieW ssssssssssssssnrrsurnnnunnnsnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanen skam 209 Feste 8 5 Configuration Ee eege dee 210 Figure 8 6 Adding New Vente sinc engeM ee 211 Figure 8 7 Creating a New Report View Using the Copy From Option 212 Figure 8 8 On demand Reports Types sssruEEENESEEENEEEEEEEESEEEEEEREEEERREEEEESEERESESESNEEEERSEEESEEEENEENEEEK EN 213 Figure 8 9 On demand Reports
241. of Alarms 7 2 2 3 Chart View This view can only be selected for historical time intervals that do not contain the current time that is if the current time interval is not the real time Auto refresh view StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZS 200 Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Filtering Alarms 7 2 3 Filtering Alarms E Filters E Name EE Every one Type Every one p mile Acknowledged KR OK Export to XLS show details Number of alarms 2011 08 01 23 2011 08 06 03 2011 08 10 07 2011 08 14 11 2011 08 18 15 lt Critical Major Warning 7 minor Figure 7 8 Chart View of Alarms In the alarms browser the third group Filters allows the specification of filter conditions of alarms Filtering is available using the following types Table 7 4 Filtering Types Type Description Name The name of the threshold which typically contains the name of the corresponding equipment such as E1909 low availability The and _ characters can be used here Most useful in the List view Level A drop down list used to filter on the severity level Critical Major Warning Minor Type A drop down list used to filter on the threshold type Grouped A drop down list used to set whether the normal and or the grouped alarms should be displayed Acknowledged Display acknowledged alarms Yes No
242. ogram contains free of charge third party Java Perl and NSIS software libraries as well a Cygwin running environment The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be Found in the third party directory on the installer CD By clicking I Agree you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT the Agreement READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE vi If you accept the terms of the agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 42 o Figure 2 33 Licence Agreement 5 Click I Agree The wizard displays components to install StarQuality User Manual amp a Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality ES starQuality Setup Bisi E Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue Choose Components Choose which features of StarQuality you want to install Description Position your mouse over Component ta see its description Select components to install Space required 185 6MB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 34 Choose Components 6 Click Next The StarQuality installation starts To view detailed information click Show Details You can copy the content of the details
243. ol and wireless management frames CIR Allocated Bits per second CIR Allocated VCA The sum of allocated CIR Committed Information Rate Downlink Uplink values for all the SUs in the sector Ethernet Throughput bits per second Ethernet Throughput VETH The average throughput per second on the Ethernet port on Downlink Uplink direction StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 4 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic KPIs Continued Key Performance Indicators KPIs KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description MIR Allocated bits per second MIR Allocated HVMA The sum of allocated MIR Maximum Information Rate Downlink Uplink values for all the SUs in the sector Noise Floor dBm Noise Floor VNF The average Noise Floor recorded by the unit Number of Connected SUs Number Of Connected SUs VCS SUs with active services Retransmission Retransmission VR The percentage of total number of retransmissions including all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions out of the total number of unicast frames transmitted over the wireless port Throughput bits per second Throughput VTHR The average throughput per second on the Radio port on Downlink Uplink direction Uptime hours Uptime VUPT BS uptime in hours RSSI RSSI VRSS StarQuality User Manual 0000 Chapter 11 De
244. on sl 10 10 141 150 BS 0 0 2 13 13 13 Air Link Utilization Export to XLS aj show details iE ml utilization 2010 05 29 02 20 2010 05 29 11 40 2010 05 30 15 40 lt Al UL Air Link Utilization Data Zone DL Air Link Utilization Data Zone DL Air Link Utilization First Zone E Figure 5 12 Display with Flash Options Peak Display the maximum measurement value Default Yes No Resolution The number of values displayed on the chart Higher resolution gives a more accurate view but if too many data points are displayed on the chart and the values change rapidly it may be difficult to have a good overview of the displayed data In this case the use of a lower resolution is recommended Minimum and Maximum values Adjust the scale of the chart s vertical axis You can also use Percentage values add the symbol In this case 100 corresponds to the average of the displayed values Measurement units for the displayed data such as 12 5M where K M and G stand for kilo mega and giga respectively 3 Click OK to activate your settings StarQuality User Manual Se SS 5 6 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Searching Measurements Searching Measurements Search strings are entered frequently in the StarQuality application in order to search by text or to filter the results There are two types of searching methods the complex search system accessed from the Search menu item
245. on M starquality Setup ulls ft Install Syste Oracle home TNS Host and port Service name SID System password Confirm password MmvzZitz Oracle connection Installing StarQuality Bie Es Please fill in the Oracle connection parameters c Oracle product 10 2 0 db_1 se e en Figure 2 19 Oracle Connection Parameters 13 Enter missing parameters and verify that the correct values are filled out in the following fields Table 2 4 Oracle Connection Parameters Parameter Description Comments Oracle Home The path to the Oracle Home directory Verify that automatic value is correct TNS The Transparent Network Substrate TNS name to be used for the database connection The TNS name appears in the tnsnames ora file on the StarQuality machine For internal Oracle SQ Host and port The host of the Oracle database server and the port used for connecting to it The default port for internal Oracle is 1521 Host can be any of the following E localhost recommended E Host name E iP E 127 0 0 1 Service name Service name of Oracle server client If this value is defined do not fill in SID For internal Oracle SQ SID Service ID in case service ID is defined in Oracle server client If this value is defined do not fill in Service name StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing
246. ons M Underrun Events The number of times that Errors Transmit Underrun Events VETU transmission of a frame was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability M Other TX Events The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other KPIs E Internally discarded MIR CIR The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum permitted information rate Ethernet Throughput bits per second Ethernet Throughput HVETH The average throughput per second on the Ethernet port on Downlink Uplink direction Frames Received frames per second Frames Received Total HVERT The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Frames Submitted frames per second Frames Submitted High HVFSH The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium The count does not include control and wireless Frames Submitted Mid VFSM management frames or retransmissions There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed High Mid and Low Frames Submitted Low VFSL Frames Submitted Total VFST StarQuality User Manual SS Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Default Bui
247. ormation This feature is available for the admin and administrator users only You can view results for all possible measurement times and the list of measurements that were unsuccessful at a given time mi gt To use the Collector Load Information I From Settings select Servers gt Collector Load The list of measurement servers is displayed with the following information General information name type status and group Size of the data files created by the server Total number of equipments connected Total number of measurements performed The maximum number of measurements for a single collector is 370 000 FHC A identifies the type of the measurement F for traffic H for error C Deprecated and A for Alvarion measurements StarQuality User Manual Se oa 265 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Viewing Collector Load Information I Browser Servers 4 Be 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary Collector load 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration 6 items found 05 Start Stop Status Name Status Type SE Import statistics Equipments FH CA Sum 06 Server events 07 Collector load e Choose Figure 9 34 Collector Load 2 Use the scroll down menu in the Import Statistics column to display results for all possible measurement times independently from the fact whether a measurement of that interval currently belongs to the given measurement server
248. ormation and description refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 135 Name and description free text IP address lt ip address gt lt 16162 gt Community public Leave all other fields with their default values 8 Click OK Discovery is running and can take up a few minutes The following window is displayed The green field means that collection is activated by default StarQuality User Manual Se Ss 143 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Name Ei IP address 172 30 105 210 16162 Community public Inherited server group SNMP name server supose Previous server None Collect data Yes Keep collected 265 data for days Timeout sec 10 Retries 1 SNMP version SNMPv1 Default measurement 15 min interval Uptime O days 01 06 52 sysDescr 0 sysContact 0 sysName 0 sysLocation 0 sysObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 1 260 Created by admin Created when 2009 02 08 16 06 08 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 02 08 16 06 08 Interface table Index IfDescr Name Order este Interval Traffic Error Additional measurements Measurement type Index Name Interval Darband Miane Crane a Darband Chane Mane AE min Figure 4 8 Data Collection Active 9 If you wish to edit the specific counters collected select Modify Equipment from the Operations drop down menu 10 choose specific measurements or all measurements by selecting the correspond
249. orresponding check boxes 8 Click Next A confirmation page is displayed listing the equipment to be activated or deleted StarQuality User Manual Se a Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations Type Name Equipment SU 00 10 E7 62 12 47 Equipment SU 00 10 E7 E2 34 AE Equipment SU 11 11 11 11 11 13 Deactivate data collection Figure 9 10 Inactive Equipment Deactivation Confirmation 9 To change your selection click Prev to return to the previous step To proceed with deleting deactivating click the Deactivate data collection or Delete button depending on your previous selection to finalize the process Upon completion of the process a result window is displayed 9 2 3 3 Managing Inactive Equipments StarQuality enables identifying the full volume of equipments whose collection is deactivated and either activate or delete them An element appears in the results of searching Bulk inactive equipment activation or deletion if its collection is turned off its entry is red ke To reactivate delete inactive equipment I Select Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration gt Bulk Inactive equipment activation or deletion The following search Options window is displayed Options activate data collection C Delete IT Delete empty parent objects Server group Search Figure 9 11 Inactive Equipment Search 2 Use the check boxes to select the action for the identified equipment Activate data col
250. ort view is the display method of the report variables You can define three types of table views M View 1 Each table contains one KPI per one NE network element in the form of the built in default reports M View 2 Each table contains multiple KPIs per CPE M View 3 Each table contains multiple KPIs per BS This section describes how to build the report tables for each of the above types me gt To start Report View configuration From the Settings menu select Reports gt Report Views The Report View Configuration starting page contains a table showing the active report views On a new system this table contains the predefined reports StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZS 208 Chapter 8 Reports Defining Report Views 02 Report views Report view configuration 03 Report export seed Name Type Toplevel First hierarchy level Result window 04 Report import copy from 05 Scheduled reports edit del tables 4Motion BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements 10 ER edit del tables 4Motion TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables 4Motion TopN Average Sector Throughput TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables 4Motion TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables Extreme BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables Extreme TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements 10 edit del tables Extreme TopN Throughput Top
251. ou can select whether the new page should be displayed in a new or in an already existing tab StarQuality User Manual amp O Chapter 3 Getting Started Using the Display Tabs gt To set the tab display options Use the following options to set the tabs display Table 3 5 Setting the Tab Display Options To Do this Select the tab display mode Right click on the menu items and select either Open in a new tab or Open in tab lt existing tab name gt Rename the tab Click the tab title type the name and press Enter Maximize minimize the page to entire Use the icon at the top right corner see Figure 3 8 window StarQuality User Manual Se SS Chapter 3 Getting Started Editing Objects 3 6 Editing Objects This section explains the general editing principles of the system The various possibilities of editing different kinds of objects are discussed in detail in the corresponding sections The list of editable objects is displayed in a table that with the exception of the Site equipment measurement Configuration page contains the most important attributes of the objects In the Settings menu you can edit the various objects of the system me gt To edit objects Use one of the following options when available Table 3 6 Editing Objects To Do this Comments Delete an object only if it has no Click del The system always sub e
252. ound between client and server Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in 16162 SNMP order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Solaris 10 x86 operating system using the command line installer All operations must be done while logged in as root user To install StarQuality I Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 The following sections describe the installation process and details Basic Checks The installer checks the following details RB Version of the operating system M Required packages RB Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality e Telnet 10 10 187 126 hash 3 668 StarQuality vu2 en bin INFO Command line parameters Installer started LOG file tmp starquality install log Checking perl ve i Found perl usr Checking OS type OS Solaris_x86 Checking perl 32 64bit Checking perl PerllO Perl was built with PerllO Checking perl threading Perl threading
253. ow mo To stop the StarQuality server Do one of the following M In the computer Service Management window myComputer gt Manage gt Services stop the service CYGWIN sshd M Open a Cygwin shell and enter the commands usr sbin apachectl stop opt starquality bin start stop pvsr stop M Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click stop all Wait for the list to refresh 2 Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are red 2 10 3 Running StarQuality on Solaris vw To start the server following initial installation I While logged in as root user enter the command by default it is not required to start it manually usr apache bin apachectl start The actual path may vary according to the Apache configuration 2 Open a web browser and go to http lt ip or hostname gt StarQuality User Manual 8 ea Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Configuration Parameters 3 Enter User Name and Password The default admin users credentials are User Name admin Password admin123 The StarQuality opening window is displayed for a few moments and then the main interface window opens A message alerting a missing licence may appear click OK and load a licence see Step 5 4 From Settings select Servers gt Licenses The Licences Configuration window is displayed Check that all
254. ow EEN 57 Te E 57 Choose CONTIG OS ES assisar aio aa ETRE 58 ele V ee Ee EEE EE ER 58 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete a annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 59 StarQuality User Manual SE Figure 2 59 Figure 2 60 Figure 2 61 Figure 2 62 Figure 2 63 Figure 2 64 Figure 2 65 Figure 2 66 Figure 2 67 Figure 2 68 Figure 2 69 Figure 2 70 Figure 2 71 Figure 2 72 Figure 2 73 Figure 2 74 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 StarQuality User Manual Figures StarQuality Windows Service Registration EEN 59 Oracle Connection Parameters es ssusrstarekeekkuENbRENEEESSEEUENEEENEEERSEEEEESENENEEERSNEEEEE EEN 60 Oracle Connection Tablespace ParametersS arrnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnen 61 Oracle Connection User Parameters kA 61 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation asrnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 62 Installation on Solaris Basic CHECKS uummmanasnsmnmnimnnsemmm im um ivnnt 65 Installing Embedded Oracle Database rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnennnnnnr 66 Installation on Solaris Basic CHECKS jm emne sehen eege NS EK ENEE eEERESNN de 73 Installation on Solaris Basic CHECKS veeeusgesuesskkeeekkkessegekk Vaekekkeegekag EAR SSES ENEEdENNe
255. panel with a red line on the left border Select any available tab from the drop down list An item with a red background means that it cannot be opened from the Measurement menu or is already in the split view mode You can also select the currently used tab in which case the information is duplicated b Browser ROOT Another Tab Reports ROOT ox B View ROOT gt Split view Operation e J n Search for the second object to be displayed Display deleted ae Search object zu typerequip resulti30 SS Split view d Select second Type Name Parent type Parent name object keem view Equpment SU 00 00 00 00 00 02 Ste BS 255 243 41 10 20 30 Elements EE view Equipment SU 09 00 00 00 07 01 Ste BS 255 243 41 10 20 30 ab Alvarion Tab Another Tab view Equipment SU 00 00 00 00 07 21 Ste BS 255 243 41 10 20 30 Caco IP SU Tab ROOT view Equipment SU 00 00 00 00 0741 Ste BS 255 243 41 10 20 30 Ethernet OAM o view Equipment SU 00 00 00 00 07 61 Ste BS 255 243 41 10 20 30 Figure 5 4 Split View Options As in the normal view mode you can navigate the hierarchy display charts etc For easy location the exact path is displayed at the top of each side When the view is split the drop down menu changes into the following options M Close split view Select which panel to close to return from split view to normal view E Scrolling Individual scroll each side separately Common scroll both s
256. pe Bursts 3 0 DL BF Ratio 4009 DL CDD Ratio 4008 DL MIMO A Ratio 4006 DL MIMO B Ratio 4007 StarQuality User Manual Cd Ee Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued 4Motion BTS KPls KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description E Burst Error Rate Downlink H 3 0 Successful Transferred Bursts Qty 4026 Counts the actual numbers of bursts count in the sampled period E 3 0M Dropped Bursts Qty 4027 ped p E Burst Error Rate Uplink TER count l Retransmission 4028 E Burst Error Rate Ratio E 3 0 Successful Transfer Ratio 4011 Ratio is based on number of bursts Downlink counted in the sampled period E 3 0M Drop Ratio 4012 Ss SSES E Burst Error Rate Ratio E 35 i Uplink Retransmission Ratio 4013 MAP Size Distribution Frames 2 5M2 MAP Length Two Symbols 4MS1 Number of frames per number of symbols per BS for the downlink E 3 0 MAP Length Four Symbols 4MS2 p i E 3 0M irection MAP Length Six Symbols 4MS3 M35 MAP Length Eight Symbols 4MS4 MAP Length Ten Symbols 4MS5 MAP Length More Than Ten Symbols 4MS6 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion BTS KPIs Table 11 7 4Motion BTS KPIs Continued KPI Version Measurement Name for Reports Code for Threshold and API Description MCS Distribution Downlink E 25M2
257. play Options Scrolling or Hiding the Submenu Items M ifthe name of a menu item is too long to display it is abbreviated To view the entire text as a tooltip move the mouse pointer over it M To hide the entire menu system click on the icon at the top right corner of the panel Figure 3 7 In this case the component can only be viewed if the mouse pointer is placed above it M To cancel the automatic hiding of the panel click on the hiding icon again A Critical 0 Major 0 Warning 47 Minor 0 Normak 262 E mmm Hiding submenu Scrolling submenu Figure 3 7 Scrolling and Hiding the Submenu Using the Display Tabs You can work with several open pages at the same time The current page or pages currently in use are displayed as tabs You navigate the opened pages with the tabs on the top of the pages The selected page always comes up in the front The tabs can also be scrolled horizontally Minimize maximiz e tab are TENNE Maps 1 a Templates ROOT ROOT Oe Tabs Tabs navigation Figure 3 8 Navigation Tabs When a page is put in the background the browser window stores its content that is subsequently restored when the user chooses to display that page again If you select a menu item the requested page is displayed instead of the current page However it is also possible to load the new page in a new tab This is the default option when using the Alarms fast menu while in the configurable menus y
258. plink Rate SU RATE AVERAGE eSU9 Modulation Rate for each MS The Min and max Rate SU RATE MAX eSU8 sampled in the mtagration period of 15min Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples SU RATE MIN eSU7 RSSI Downlink Uplink dBm SU RSSI AVERAGE eSU6 RSSI is sampled from each burst Min and max RSSI value SU RSSI MAX eSUS sampled in the integration period of 15min Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples SU RSSI MIN eSU4 SU Repetition Ratio SU Repetition Ratio eSUc Ratio between CPE HARQ repetitions to Total Bursts StarQuality User Manual Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Table 11 11 Extreme SU KPIs Continued Extreme MS KPIs KPI Measurement Name Code for Descripton Threshold and API SNR Downlink Uplink dB SU SNR AVERAGE HeSU3 SNR Min and max SNR value sampled in the integration SU SNR MAX HESU2 period of 15min Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples SU SNR MIN eSU1 SU Throughput Bits per Second SU Throughput eSUg Counts the bytes transferred and calculates the transferred rate normalized to the active frames MS transferred the counted bytes SU Transfer Ratio SU Transfer Ratio eSUa Ratio between CPE Total BURSTS to CPE Total BURSTS and CPE Dropped Bursts SU Transfer Overhead SU Transfer overhead eSUd Ratio between CPE HARQ NACKs and CPE HARQ ACKs StarQuality User Manual Glossary Glossary The followin
259. pments 6 5 Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments To assign a threshold template to multiple equipments 1 From Settings select Threshold gt Configuration The threshold list is displayed 2 Do one of the following Click now next to the threshold entry The system searches for NEs matching the threshold template which do not implement it If any such NEs are found the template is applied to them Click from template and proceed with the next steps 3 Choose a threshold template from the drop down list The Threshold Configuration editor displays the attributes of the template Threshold configuration Threshold template Host virtual memory usage gt x Name lt equipl gt lt varl gt gt lt inputl gt Expression Variable1 SNMP Virtual memory usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample Measurements within the same J equipment Measurements with the same description variable Equipment name filter Measurement name ariables ilter 1 l I impura Ins mum mun Type None z E mail SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert When Non stop zl OK Cancel Figure 6 6 Using Threshold Template 4 If required edit the values in the template If the threshold contains references to multiple variables check the Measurements within the same equipment and the Measurements with the same description checkboxes StarQuality User Manual Chapter 6 Settin
260. png v Time zone Time zone of the server 7 Business hours Non stop v Figure 4 2 Creating New Equipments from Template WiMAX FDD 6 In the Creation section make sure the Equipment option is selected 7 In the Discover Equipments field select either No to add equipments manually see Step 9 Input File to upload a text file See Step 10 The Yes and Offline options are not applicable for WiMAX equipment 8 In the Community section override the Read community setting with the relevant one for your network 9 If you selected No a Click OK The system returns to the main network list For example equipment 1 192 168 120 120 4M equipment 2 second site 192 168 121 121 equipment 3 192 192 192 192 4M b Click Add new to add as many equipments as required C In each line enter BTS name free text up to 46 characters site name description and IP address see Figure 4 3 Name and IP address are mandatory StarQuality User Manual Se ee 136 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Setting Automatic Discovery of Equipment from AlvariSTAR INFORMATION Searching and displaying of devices in StarQuality is done by names only therefore it is advised to keep a systematic naming convention for example it is recommended to name each device by its IP 10 If you selected Input File a Prepare a text file in which each line signifies a BTS Each line entry includes three columns in the follo
261. port OR SolarisX86 10 64bit English 1 1 x Intel XEON E5620 2 4 GHz 2 12 GB RAM 3 4x HDD SAS 300 GB 15000 RPM For Solaris x86 the network card and RAID controller must be listed in their respective developer approved lists 1 1 x 300 GB OS StarQuality Oracle 2 2 x 300 GB RAIDO StarQuality Oracle Tablespace 3 1 x 300 GB Oracle Redo Log Undo Tablespace 1 350 BTSs 2 50 000 CPEs 3 20 concurrent clients Windows 2008 R2 64Bit Standard Edition English OR SolarisX86 10 64bit English 1 1 x Intel XEON E5620 2 4GHz 2 16 GB RAM 3 4x HDD SAS 300 GB 15000 RPM For Solaris x86 the network card and RAID controller must be listed in their respective developer approved lists 1 1 x 300 GB OS StarQuality Oracle 2 2 x 300 GB RAIDO StarQuality Oracle Tablespace 3 1 x 300 Oracle Redo Log Undo Tablespace StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Table 2 2 Requirements Based on Capacity Continued HW SW and Disk Allocation Requirements Maximum Capacity Operating Systems HW Requirements for Each Server Disk Allocation 1 1000 BTSs 2 100 000 CPEs 3 20 concurrent clients SolarisX86 10 64bit English 1 1 x Intel XEON E5630 2 53GHz2 2 24 GB RAM 3 6 x HDD SAS 500 GB 15000 RPM The network card and RAID controller must be listed in their respective Solaris developer approved lists 1 1 x 500 GB OS
262. port is a wizard driven utility used for exporting data from the StarQuality database into x s files according to the following user defined cross sections M Timeframe up to one week M Network elements Type SU AU or common BTS data The number of exported lines is limited to 65 000 per single export If more lines are required reduce the number of NEs or narrow the timeframe per export Technology FDD FDD SNMP TDD 4Motion VL Extreme The system enables choosing specific elements from the list of NEs matching the above conditions All the KPI relevant the NEs are exported That is you cannot select specific KPls for export You can view or save the x s file on the client machine at any location To export AU or common BTS data I From Reports select Bulk Export Wizard The Bulk Export Wizard window is displayed Alarms GE ge h gt Measurements 01 Search es Reports 04 Bulk export wizard Ke Settings I Browser Bulk export wizard D Basic parameters gt BTS selection Selection Er menn Report remark free text Path From YYYY MM DD HH24 MISS 2008 Hos 20 oc 00 lon To YYYY MM DD HH24 MESS 2003 Hos la o0 o0 00 NE type ETS Y Technology 4Motion 5 Figure 8 20 Bulk Export Wizard Window 2 Specify meaningful name and description free text to the report StarQuality User Manual Se SES 2 Chapter 8 Reports
263. r 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates HVAR2 044030 gt 5000 0 1 1 Verified Expression Variablel WiMAX 4Motion Successful Ho Attempts Table gt 5000 0 1x in 1 sample or Variable2 WiMAX 4Motion Failed Ho Attempts Table gt 5000 0 1x in 1 sample Expression 2 VAR1 O 4AST OUT lt 50 0 3 3 or VAR2 O 4AST IN lt 50 0 3 3 Verified Expression Variablel WiMAX 4Motion Average Sector Throughput Table Downlink lt 50 0 3x in 3 sample or Variable2 WiMAX 4Motion Average Sector Throughput Table Uplink lt 50 0 3x in 3 sample Trendline Expression TREND LINE DIFF 2 0 VAR1 O 4021 lt 5 1 1 Verified expression Variablel WiMAX 4Motion Active MS Qty Table Trend Difference lt 5 1x in 1 sample For lists of syntax elements for thresholds refer to Chapter 11 StarQuality User Manual Se SS Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates Usually only the following part of the Perl syntax is necessary and and expression or or expression mathematical operations punctuation l logical negation lt lt gt gt value comparators StarQuality supports multiple variables and logical operators as shown below VAR1 OUPT lt INPUT1 and VAR1 OUPT gt O 1414 and not VAR2 OUPT lt INPUT2 and VAR2 OUPT gt O 1 414 xor VAR3 OU
264. r management Not applicable User admin admin only Adding deleting and modifying users User rights admin only Configuring which privileges permissions the users should possess Password Changing password StarQuality User Manual Se amp Paz 232 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Site and Equipment Configuration 9 2 Site and Equipment Configuration 9 2 1 Introduction A StarQuality site can include any combination of sites and or equipments under it A collector type defines the site and by default all the elements under it unless otherwise configured The ROOT is a unique site that differs from the above Itis the only element in a newly activated system It can only have sites directly under it It is not defined by a collector type Using the Site and Equipment Configuration menu item you can search create delete modify and manage sites equipment and measurements You can apply your changes to individual elements or perform a bulk operation over multiple elements The following sections describe the available operations starting from the items in work area to operations using sub menus in the Browser see Figure 9 1 M Operations in the work area Navigating viewing and manipulating single elements sites and equipments Using the drop down menu options M Operations using the items in the browser Bulk operations on sites and equipments Bulk deletion Managing equipments with
265. rQuality Data tablespace name SQ DATA QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace file export home oracle oradata SQ SQ DATA dbf QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes INFO Oracle tablespace SQ DATA created QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user name SQ QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user password INFO Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes INFO Oracle user SQ created Finishing the Installation I The installer generates the schematic maps and exits StarQuality User Manual Se amp te Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Redrawing schematic maps INFO Installer ended bash 3 00 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Running StarQuality on Solaris on page 108 Configuration Parameters on page 109 StarQuality User Manual 2 6 2 6 1 2 6 1 1 2 6 1 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality InstallationInstallation on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Installation on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system This installation type involves configuration of the Solaris kernel parameters and the inst
266. rQuality Installation Data Aggregation and Data Retention Settings M Choose wether StarQuality should store the raw XML performance collection files generated by WiMAX devices See Saving Performance Collection Files on page 275 for details M Keep in mind that the maximum number of measurements for a single collector is 370 000 See Activation Deactivation of Data Collection on page 139 for details on running the collectors Contact Alvarion s customer service for more information 2 10 5 Data Aggregation and Data Retention Settings By default StarQuality stores measurements received in the performance collection files in 15 minutes cycles for 31 days After that data is archived in hourly averages The hourly averages are deleted after 340 days In high load scenarios it is recommended to perform custom database sizing and configuration For details please contact Alvarion Professional Services StarQuality User Manual Se D 2 11 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation StarQuality Upgrade StarQuality Upgrade The upgrade has to be performed by an administrator user For information on available upgrade paths see the Release Notes Stop the StarQuality service and processes prior to upgrade NOTE If you are running an upgrade the installer may not keep the StarQuality files or existing collected e data Therefore prior to upgrade make sure to check the Release Notes for version specific H inform
267. racle install step USER ADD lt finished Wednesday June 2 2010 12 3 2 19 PM IDT gt INFO Oracle install step SETUP ADD start Wednesday June 2 2010 12 32 19 PM IDT gt Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 10 Generic January 2005 Starting Oracle Universal Installer installer requirements operating system version must be 5 16 Actual 5 1 Passed Temp space must be greater than 250 MB Actual 7741 MB Passed swap space must be greater than 500 MB Actual 8649 MB Passed All installer requirements met Preparing to launch Oracle Universal Installer from tmp Oralnstall2 1i 6 92 12 32 2 PM Please wait Oracle Universal Installer Version 16 2 6 1 6 Producti on Copyright lt C gt 1999 2005 Oracle All rights reserved You can find a log of this install session at export home orac le oralnventory logs installfctions2 1i 6 82 12 32 2 PM log z Figure 2 65 Installing Embedded Oracle Database Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation arQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts for the following Operating system user name to be created Operating system group to be created Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M Profile file to be used M Type of StarQualit
268. ration New section Data Aggregation and Data New section Retention Settings Saving Performance Collection Files New section Creating and Editing Threshold Templates Updates regarding threshold naming SNMP traps multiple variable logical operators and trendline support Ver 3 1 10 March 2011 StarQuality User Manual Document History Changed Item Description Date Configuration Parameters Section completely rewritten StarQuality Upgrade on Solaris Added information about Oracle database restart StarQuality Installation Updated Oracle Database installation procedures to include setting up the data files and redo logs Table 6 1 New table Replaced examples for specifying threshold attributes Licence Configuration Added information on how to find out the database ID Table 2 3 Added opened port for discovering StarQuality from AlvariSTAR Equipment Deletion Section removed Threshold Modification for Equipment Section removed Editing Charts for Equipment Section removed Creating and Editing Virtual Equipment Section removed Linked Equipment Section removed Customizing Display Preferences Non Administrator Users Only Section removed Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Items Section removed Configuring Public and Private Charts Section removed Installation on Linux Serv
269. recipients defined the following occurs upon violation of the threshold M e mail recipients If the specific e mail recipient is defined for bulk threshold e mail sending StarQuality will aggregate the full list of violations for the given interval into a single e mail message If the specific e mail recipient is not defined for bulk threshold sending a separate e mail message will be sent for each violation M SNMP recipients An SNMP notification will be sent per each violation instance to each of the SNMP recipients specified in the threshold 10 3 2 Scheduled Reports Scheduled Reports are sent in e mail messages to the defined recipients according to the defined recurrence For more information see Scheduling Report Delivery on page 219 10 3 3 Admin Messages Notifications will be sent as e mail messages to the defined recipients regarding the following server events M Collectors on off M Database usage issues E Errors in collector operation StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS D Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI SOAP Interface 10 4 SOAP Interface StarQuality SOAP interface enables various NBI operations via third party applications A prerequisite for enabling SOAP operations is activation of the StarQuality SOAP server For description and instructions on available operations refer to the StarQuality SOAP Manual StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 272 Chapter 11 Device Sp
270. rement s at the left column and the calculation min max avg etc on the right column 8 Click Object Parameters in the selection path A list of parameters is displayed These parameters will be the columns of the report Some of the parameters are already selected StarQuality User Manual Se amp Des 215 Chapter 8 Reports Day Week Month Year D Chart settings Working with On Demand Reports s gt Object parameters An joo as es g Field Ste name Site deserption Equpment name Equpment description Measurement name Measurement description Measurement index Measurement remark JE Figure 8 12 On demand Reports Object Parameters 9 Select the Measurement name check box The Show and Save options are enabled at the selection path 10 Click Save to save the report settings optional The following window is displayed Specify the report name and choose if to include the search settings I Browser on demand report mm QU 200s stet lg Feste gt Search gt Measurement oes gt Obiect oorameters gt Save gt show Prev Next Einih Export to XLS mr MF a SYST esel maz i 89 onuran savethe search 15 16 7 18 19 2 21 field as welt 2 aW 2 7 2 New template E 2 30 OK Delete Day Week Month Year Figure 8 13 On demand Reports Saving Options 11 Click Show to display the report in a regular report format including the option to specify time frame and
271. rep gzip ess ibbz2 1 libdb4 5 ibexpat1 ibexpat1 devel libgdbm4 ibiconv2 ibintl3 libintl8 ibncurses8 ibpcreO libpopto ibreadline6 ibwrapO login make mingw runtime minires openssh openssl perl version 5 8 x x StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks ping sed tar termcap terminfo texinfo tzcode vim w32api which zlib OR From Alvarion FTP server Download the CygwinFromWwwGoh4Com zip file from ftp downloads alvarion com StarSuite Star Quality Installations Username and password are required when connecting as an Alvarion customer 2 Extract the zip file into a folder with a path that does not include spaces 3 From the extracted files run the setup exe file The Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window is displayed Cygwin Setup Mil EN Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This setup program is used for the initial installation of the Cygwin environment as well as all subsequent updates Make sure to remember where you saved it The pages that follow will guide you through the installation Please note that Cygwin consists of a large number of packages spanning wide variety of purposes We only install a base set of packages by default You can always run this program at any time in the future to add remove or upgrade packages as necessary CE Setup exe version 2 573 2 3 Copyright 2000 2007 http van cpgwin com Cancel Figure 2 45 Cygwin Net Rel
272. ries from the registry 4 Restart the computer 5 Verify that the installing user has administrator rights Java 1 5 Is Missing on Solaris If the installation requires java1 5 enter the full path including java foe example Justijdk instances jidk 1 5 O binjava Installing via TeamViewer Before beginning the installation open the Teamviewer server 1 Open extras gt options gt advanced gt show advanced options gt advanced network settings 2 Select the check box Don t use incoming ports 80 3 Click OK and verify that port 80 is free Installing on a 64 Bit Windows Machine with Oracle 64 Bit Use Oracle 32 bit client Installing on a 64 Bit Windows Machine with External Oracle Do one of the following E Use Oracle 32 bit client E Insert a registry entry as follows a Create an ORACLE key in regedit under HKLM SOFTWARE WOW6432Node b Add a new String value to this key with Name ORACLE HOME Value Oraclexe home where bin is found and bin should contain sqlplus exe StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation Troubleshooting Problem Issue Action When running StarQuality installer for upgrade or uninstall the process halts with the following message Server module XXX is still running Check for running StarQuality processes In the folder 0pttarquality tmp look for files with names such as p
273. ring the previous measurement In both cases the system will send an e mail and or SNMP clearing event when the threshold violation is ended When Which time period template is used for the threshold The possible options are set in Settings gt Templates gt Exclusion Window Templates Automatically applied below site Specify the site under which the threshold template will be applied whenever NEs are introduced into this site Recommended ROOT See also Automatic Assignment of Threshold Templates on page 182 When you specify a site two additional field are displayed Equipment name like Enter a string for the system to search and filter The found equipment will be assigned the threshold template 0 Equipment name not like Enter a string for the system to search and filter out The found equipment will not be assigned the threshold template If you do not specify the filtering parameters above recommended the threshold template parameters are used for every threshold created based on this template 3 Specify the threshold attributes in the Expression section The threshold syntax contains 4 parts separated by a key That is lt value VARx gt lt comparators gt lt gt reference value gt lt frequency gt You can also have relations between expressions Or And Examples Expression 1 VAR1 O 4029 gt 5000 0 1 1 or StarQuality User Manual Se 8 SS Chapte
274. rmance collection file is kept in the 0pttarquality tmp Xxml archive directory StarQuality User Manual Fe amp G Chapter 11 Device Specific Information BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment 11 3 BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment 11 3 1 Overview M The information in this section is common to the following equipment types BreezeMAX FDD SNMP BreezeMAX FDD BreezeMAX TDD mM SW Compatibility FDD 3 5 3 6 SNMP based collection FDD 3 7 3 8 TDD 4 5 4 6 Refer to the Release Notes for specific Firmware versions M Collector type FDD 3 5 3 6 WiMAX FDD SNMP FDD 3 7 3 8 WiMAX FDD TFTP TDD WiMAX TDD StarQuality User Manual Q Ke 8 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Network Discovery Prerequisites 11 3 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites Table 11 1 BTS Configuration Requirements Requirement FDD FDD TDD SNMP TFTP Collection Interval Setting rbCollectionStatisticsinterval 900 sec StarQuality registered as Authorised Manager Traps disabled PM TM Collection Activated Mode Basic 11 3 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 3 3 1 BS KPIs Each of the following is available for both Downlink DL and Uplink UL StarQuality User Manual SS amp Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 2 FDD and TDD Traffic BS KPIs KPI Code for Threshold and API Description
275. rmcap tzcode which OR base files binutils crypt cygwin findutils gcc g grep ibbz2_1 ibexpat1 devel ibintl3 ibpcreO ibwrapO mingw runtime openssl sed terminfo vim zlib base passwd bzip2 cygrunsrv editrights gawk gcc mingw core gzip libdb4 5 libgdbm4 libintl8 libpopto login minires perl version 5 8 x x tar texinfo w32api From Alvarion FTP server Download the CygwinFromWwwGoh4Ccom zjp file from ftp downloads alvarion com StarSuite Star Quality Installations Username and password are required when connecting as an Alvarion customer StarQuality User Manual Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 2 Extract the zip file into a folder with a path that does not include spaces 3 From the extracted files run the setup exe file The Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window is displayed Cygwin Setup mfe EN Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This setup program is used for the initial installation of the Cygwin environment as well as all subsequent updates Make sure to remember where you saved it The pages that follow will quide you through the installation Please note that Cygwin consists of a large number of packages spanning wide variety of purposes We only install base set of packages by default You can always run this program at any time in the future to add remove or upgrade packages as necessary C Setup exe version 2
276. rovisioned N Y N N MS KPIs 1 CINR Downlink Min Y N Y Y from 3 0 name was changed to SINR Max Y N Average Y Y Y Y StarQuality User Manual SS Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management Table 11 6 4Motion KPIs Per Firmware Version Continued KPI Name in StarQuality 2 5M2 3 0 3 0M 3 5 Comments 2 CINR Uplink Min Y N Y Y from 3 0 name was changed to SINR Max Y N Y Y Average Y Y Y Y 3 Average Spectral Efficiency Y N N N 4 MCS Downlink Y Y Y Y from 3 0M 3 5 name was changed to Spectral Efficiency Downlink Uplink Y Y Y Y 5 RSSI Downlink N N Y Y Uplink Y Y Y Y 6 Aggregated Throughput N Y Y Y 7 Total Transferred Bursts N Y N N 8 Throughput Ratio N Y Y Y 9 MS Burst Error Rate Downlink N Y Y Y Uplink N Y Y y 10 MS Burst Error Rate Ratio Downlink N Y Y Y Uplink N Y Y Y Distributed ASNGW KPIs 1 Average Backhaul Traffic Y Y Y Y 2 R3 Throughput 3 R3 MIR Throughput Oversubscription N StarQuality User Manual E C3 Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management Table 11 6 4Motion KPIs Per Firmware Version Continued KPI Name in StarQuality 2 5M2 3 0 3 0M 3 5 Comments 4 R3 CIR Throughput Oversubscription N Y Y Y 5 R6 Throughput N Y Y Y 6 R6 Total MIR N Y Y Y 7 R6 Total CIR N Y Y Y 8 ASN GW MS Registration N
277. rror measurement Tablell Inout value gt INPUT1 vi Figure 6 10 Threshold Template Configuration Template List 000006 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Editing an Existing Threshold Template Threshold template configuration Name FDD SNMP OCCUPATION Threshold name Occupstion downlink lt 50 FVARI OSWOCC OUT lt 50 013 13 ot Expression v al Validate Validate Variable1 WiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 1xin 1 sample FS 2 Type mere E mail SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert Vv When OK Cancel Figure 6 11 Threshold Template Configuration Editing 3 Modify the required threshold attributes see detailed information in on page 176 4 Click OK to save your modification to the template If no thresholds are based on this template the modifications are saved and the list of threshold templates reappears If there are thresholds based on this template the Threshold Configuration editor displays the modified attributes and lists these potentially affected thresholds for approval Figure 6 12 Threshold template configuration There are 3 thresholds based on this template see below Do you want to apply the following changes to them as well Name New value es E mail amos Thresholds Name New New 1 New 2 Figure 6 12 Message on Template based Threshold Modification The settings made here will override any
278. rsion Site Motion Q 3 1 version BS mi Chart 255 243 41 0 0 10 Active MS Equipment Q 3 1 version Idle MS Registered MS Q 3 1 version BS 255 243 41 0 0 10 lt Seen s Vv Chart Active Idle MSs out of Equipment Q 3 1 version registered Q 3 1 version BS RW Chart 255 243 41 0 0 10 Air Link Equipment Q 3 1 version Utilization Figure 9 7 Item Selection 6 Click Select to finalize 9 2 3 2 Managing Equipment with Unsuccessful Measurements StarQuality enables identifying and handling equipments with continuous unsuccessful measurements either by deleting them from the system or by deactivating their data collection in order to avoid system overhead An element appears in the results of search for unsuccessful measurements if none of its measurements are successful for the time span defined in the Search parameters To manage unsuccessful measurements I Select Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration gt Search for unsuccessful measurements The following search Options window is displayed Options Inactive equipments Unsuccessful measurements Deactivate data collection Delete 159 9 Delete empty parent objects Server group WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP x Time span Search Figure 9 8 Unsuccessful Measurements Search StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 240 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations 2 Leave the Inactive equipments option selected equipments
279. rt The information includes BTS no BTS name by StarQuality Serving BS and CPE MAC address lax Operation ad fe b Browser Site and equipment confi 4 ROOT gt Monitored SUs gt SU 00 10 E7 E2 2E BF Name SU 00 10 E7 2 2E B4 y IP address 10 10 184 23 Operations Community public D rop down ee server grouP WiMAX FDD M anu Server MAX FOD Colector BEE WEE WiMAX inventory report Collect data Yes Keep collected op data for days 5 Default measurement 15 min interval Created by admin xl Figure 9 5 Operations Drop down Menu in Equipment Level 9 2 3 Bulk Operations This section describes that can be applied to multiple elements in the network 9 2 3 1 Bulk Deletion of Equipment StarQuality enables deletion of multiple equipments at once This may be required for example in case of migration from 16d to 16e To delete multiple elements 1 Do one of the following Select Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration gt Bulk Deletion From the Operations drop down menu select Bulk Deletion see Figure 9 4 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 9 General Setting Options Bulk Operations The Options window is displayed together with the Search options Options T Delete non empty sites I Delete empty parent objects I Delete empty equipments OK Advanced search Search object parentiyes result 500 Figure 9
280. s lt Back Cancel Figure 2 5 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State StarQuality User Manual Se amp amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 8 Click on the word Default in the main All entry package see Figure 2 6 and change it to Install Cygwin Setup Select Packages DS Select Packages a Select packages to install C Keep C Prev Cum C Exp View Category Caso New 18 See Package S S EI All 4 Install Admin 43 Install Audio 4 Install Base 4 Install Database 4 Install Devel amp Install Doc 4 Install Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install vw Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 6 Select Packages Window All Install H Verify that all the entries under the All main package have also been changed to Install If not change them 10 Scroll down to the Perl package and expand it by clicking on the sign 11 Check the sub package under Perl If it is different than 5 8 x x e g skip click on it to change it to the required 5 8 x X INFORMATION The Perl version must be 5 8 x x otherwise it does not meet the StarQuality requirements If you have a different Perl version use a different cygwin installation package StarQuality User Manual Se G amp 13 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Se
281. s gt Settings b Browser Customization 4 In 01 Public charts E 02 Public menu items 03 External links User preferences Key bindings Fet Language Defaut 1 History Next cri right Disable Measurement view icons List C Detailed 2 History Previous Ctri Left Disable Sr Private public and original v 3 Tab Close ataw Disable Single select entry V ves 4 Tab Max Min crim Disable Starting page Empty 5 Tab Next G at Disable Des Gene ERE pone C Long description Short description 6 Tab Previous G faite Disable Sore Private public and normal charts SZ Alarm refresh 15 min 3 Alarm window Current z Equip actual results rem si ee Daily 5 min lt Time zone of the server Y Ke show Donot show for equipments Veteran E show Do not show Flash charts V yes Indicator Individual Common Y prefix automatic None Maximum number of Flash chart elements Flash chart value indicators Reset objects IV ves Figure 9 22 Preferences 2 Select the options to set as your system default Table 9 4 User Preferences Item Description Language Select the GUI language Measurement view Select the default view when opening the Measurement page Icons List or Detailed Virtual site equipment objects Not Applicable Select whether the private and public virtual or the default h
282. s All Management gt Performance Categories selected M For MS data select All MS Basic Data it is not selected by default General Settings Setting the Delay Parameter on 4Motion Base Stations On 4Motion base stations the Delay parameter establishes a time span between the moment a cycle ends and the time it can be imported into StarQuality instead of the previous cycle s file For example if the delay is set to 2 minutes the cycle that ended at 16 15 is read for StarQuality at 16 17 Until then StarQuality only reads the 16 00 cycle The purpose of this setting is to compensate for any delays the device may have in building the performance collection file All the time values are in reference to the equipments time You can set both a generic delay for all the equipments and specific delays for individual devices if you wish to override the generic delay To set a generic delay parameter I Goto opt starquality etc and open the CONFIG_ N pm file 2 Set the WIMAX 4Motion DELAY parameter to the desired delay duration expressed in seconds In the example above the 2 minutes delay is set as SWIMAX 4Motion DELAY 120 By default the WIMAX 4Motion DELAY parameter is set to o no delay StarQuality User Manual SS Fe gt Gi gt 11 5 2 2 11 5 3 Chapter 11 Device Specific Information 4Motion Version Management To set the delay parameter for a specific device I Goto Settings gt Site and equipment conf
283. s Read more about file modes lt Back Cancel Figure 2 47 Select Root Install Directory Window StarQuality User Manual Se amp amp e Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks 6 Choose the default settings recommended on the screen Verify that the Root directory is a local drive and click Next The Select Local Package Directory window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Local Package Directory JOPx Select Local Package Directory 2 Select a directory where you want Setup to store the installation files it downloads The directory will be created if it does not already exist Local Package Directory CATEMPSCyawinFromywwGoh4Coms CygwinFromywwG oh4Corm Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 2 48 Select Local Package Directory Window 7 Verify that the path to the Local Package Directory is correct and click Next The Select Packages window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Packages Mel x Select Packages a Select packages to install C Keep Prev e C Exp View Category Cas New 8 See Package D All 4 Default Admin 4 Default Audio 6 Default Base 4 Default Database 4 Default Devel Default Doc 6 Default Editors amp Default Gnome 4 Default All Defaul entry ofl JV Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 49 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State StarQuality
284. s The database ID will be displayed at the top of the page as shown in Figure 9 27 StarQuality User Manual Se amp ES 256 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Licence Configuration Licence configuration Customer integration lab Database ID 2139661190 Current database ID 2139661190 add new reactivate eqs Name End date Quantity Needed Error type del PYSR 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C ORA 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C SNMP 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C UNIX 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C WIMAX 4MOTION 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C WIMAX EXTREME 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C WIMAX FDD 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C WIMAX FDD TFTP 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C WIMAX TDD 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 del PYSR C WIMAX YL 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 SE del PYSR DEVICE 2012 01 01 10 0 del PYSR DEVICE WIMAX BS 2012 01 01 200 24 del PYSR DEVICE WIMAX SU 2012 01 01 UNLIMITED 44 del PYSR SOAP 3 0 2012 01 01 1 1 Figure 9 27 Licence Configuration Screen 9 5 2 2 Managing Licences The Licences submenu is available only for admin users You can edit the license table and compare the number of available and required licences If there are fewer licences available than required for operating the system or any of the licenses has expired then users receive a warning message during the login process Licence data can only uploaded and deleted but not edited The indi
285. s SMTP server 2 6 1 3 Installing the Oracle Server Follow these guidelines M Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server version M install the Oracle Server according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation M Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes a Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation M During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality machine must be available To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sq p us utility as follows a Switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user b Enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme assuming that the database SID is testme and the system password is oracle If the SQL prompt is displayed connectivity to the database server is confirmed Report any error message the database administrator c Enter exit Windows or quit Solaris to complete the procedure StarQuality User Manual Se amp Ge 2 6 2 2 6 2 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M The following Oracle database information must be available when installing StarQuality Service name or Service ID TNS Transpar
286. s collected by SNMP for which data collection has to be activated manually 4 2 1 Manually Activating WiMAX Devices Discovery This section describes how to add BTSs to the network _ To manually activate discovery I Verify that the Network Discovery Prerequisites relevant for the WiMAX type are met refer to Chapter 11 2 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration Enter the site matching the equipment type to be discovered by clicking its icon NR UW From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipments plural from Template 5 The correct template is automatically inherited from the site Click OK If you need to override it select the template upon which to base the equipment setup For FDD ver3 5 3 6 WiMAX FDD SNMP For FDD ver3 7 WiMAX FDD TFTP For TDD TDD For 4Motion WiMAX 4Motion For VL WiMAX VL For Extreme WiMAX Extreme A basic setup template page is displayed INFORMATION Mf Each discovery can include a single equipment type E Equipment with names or IP addresses that is already monitored is not rediscovered StarQuality User Manual Se 8 E 135 Chapter 4 Network Discovery Manually Activating WiMAX Devices Discovery Template name WiMAX FDD e Equipment Creation Job Job creation and run Discover equipments offline ves Input file No Add nonexistent sites JV Community public Choose an icon ka icon WMAX BTS
287. s the Apache htpasswd file usr bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc httpd conf httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc httpd conf httpd conf 20110309 113933 from etc httpd conf httpd conf INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc httpd conf httpd conf INFO Using basic authentication INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server then the installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server is running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO
288. sample Sample size 3 Click the Add to link The application inserts the required element at the current cursor position in the text which can be of one of the following two types depending on the values of the fields If the compare value is filled the application inserts a complete sub expression element namely selected_ measurement code operator compare value frequency in how many If the compare value is not filled the application inserts only the code of the selected measurement 4 Anytime during the editing process you can click on the Validate link to check whether the expression has the required syntax If the syntax is invalid an error message is displayed and if it is valid the user readable format of the expression is displayed in the validate field StarQuality User Manual Se amp D amp Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds Generating the Expression Using Input Fields Usually only the following part of the Perl syntax is necessary and and expression or or expression mathematical operations punctuation l logical negation lt lt gt gt value comparators The lists of Thresholds syntax elements are described in Device Specific Information on page 273 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring In this chapter M Overview on page 195 HM Navigating Viewing and Filtering
289. scribes how to activate or stop data collection for any equipment type Use this procedure also to activate data collection for NMP FDD ver3 5 3 6 and BreezeACCESS VL SUs To activate or deactivate data collection for any equipment type I Click the site icon to enter the site 2 For each equipment repeat the following a Click edit next to the equipment you want to activate The following window is displayed measurement types themselves may vary according to the specific equipment SU BTS Server Health element StarQuality User Manual Se amp De amp Chapter 4 Network Discovery Activation Deactivation of Data Collection Parent site FDD TFTP x Name 10 0 16 10 IP address 10 0 16 10 Community public Keep collected E data for days Timeout sec Retries Default measurement r interval 15 min Z Choose an icon z3 Jicon_equip png 7 Server group WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP 7 Collect data JW Additional measurements m Pe Measurement type Name Other Collected All types I Index OK parameters Switched Max Interval data Yei IV Air Link Occupation 1 Slot 1 Air Link Occupation D D i00 15min 93 D IV ar Link Occupation 3 Slot 3 Air Link Occupation E F fioo 15min 93 Bj Figure 4 5 Activating Data Collection b Select or deselect the Collect Data check box at the bottom of the upper table C Select or des
290. ser starq opt starquality bash profile INFO Setting the PS1 environment variable to u h INFO Setting the ORACLE HOME environment variable to home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 INFO Setting the LD LIBRARY PATH environment variable to opt starquality lib home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 1lib INFO Setting the PATH environment variable to usr local bin home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client_2 bin PATH INFO Environment checking is done INFO Searching for running StarQuality modules INFO Oracle checking QUESTION TNS name QUESTION Oracle host name localhost QUESTION Oracle port 1521 QUESTION Oracle service name QUESTION Oracle SID QUESTION Oracle SYSTEM user password CONFIRM Confirm the password INFO Attempting to tnsping db150 INFO Successful StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS 2 9 2 4 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Attempting to tnsping 192 168 10 101 1521 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the TNS name db150 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the SID db150 INFO Successful INFO Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the service name INFO Successful INFO Oracle checking successful INFO Configuring user SSH parameters INFO Done INFO Saving previous S
291. site equipment modification window is properties displayed with configurable parameters Figure 9 2 Delete a site equipment Click del del is displayed only if the equipment or a site has no other network elements under it Additional operations in site or equipment levels Use the Operation drop down menus Items in the Operations drop down menus vary depending on hierarchy level StarQuality User Manual Chapter 9 General Setting Options Work Area Operations a ROOT gt FDD CSLAB gt 10 10 184 1 SUs gt Slot 2 gt SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E Operation x Parent site FoD CSLAB 10 10 184 1 SUs Slot 2 SS Name SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E Description IP address 10 10 184 1 Community public Keep collected THE data for days Timeout sec Retries L Default measurement 15 min z interval 15 min 2 Choose an icon 3 icon FDD SU png SS Time zone Time zone of the server EN Business hours non stop X Server group no server group definied SS Collect data NW Additional measurements m Peal Measurement type Name Other Collected All types v Index OK parameters Switched Max Interval data Vea IV Su Acknowledged Bytes o SU Acknovdedged Bytes m P 100 15mn 31 0 Figure 9 2 Example of Equipment Modification Window 9 2 2 2 Operations in Site Level Sites can be configured using various operations available in two drop down menus in the main
292. snnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 202 Chapter 8 Reports sorier en E aaea E 204 8 1 OVE TEN eee 205 8 2 Report COM FUTON eu deeg 206 8 2 1 Defining Report VAP E 206 8 2 2 Defining Report EE 208 8 2 3 Working with On Demand Reports wissiscdineicnseanctnnnanannnsentnn sien ctnnandananenemnddsianamanans 213 8 3 Importing and Exporting Report Definitions a rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennn 217 8 4 Scheduling Report Delivery ess etasgeeansdeeueusseeaietee ER ESEAER EERSTEN ESEESE ER 219 85 Veme Reports sara 221 8 5 1 Navigating Report VIES area 221 8 5 2 Setting the Report Range and Display rrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 222 8 6 Exporting Data from the StarQuality Database a nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenr 224 8 6 1 Using the BUK Export Wizard Luanda innerste 224 8 6 2 Bulk Export External SR AE a a 229 Chapter 9 General Setting Options SEENEN NEEN ENNEN ENNEN EEN 230 9 1 VEE eee 231 9 2 Site and Equipment Configuration arnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnunnvnnnn 233 9 2 1 Hod arv 233 9 2 2 Work Area OperationS ieee sctasid a dacue te nastannceseonecdeenmmaceumnencasientoanuahdawseae eh atheensenanebeee 234 9 2 3 BUK EE 238 9 2 4 4Motion Data Collection Gap Pillmg AAA 245 9 3 ESCHEID 248 9 3 1 SETE PSN eege 248 9 3 2 Setting E mail Addresses Admin only EEN 251 9 4 Templates admin only E 253 9 5 Server Configuration and Mana
293. stall Cygwin Section 2 3 2 N WwW Install StarQuality Section 2 3 2 2 5 Load a StarQuality license Section 2 10 1 6 Run StarQuality Section 2 10 2 Pre installation Tasks Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements StarQuality User Manual Se amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Table 2 5 Network Ports Pre installation Tasks Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed equipment 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS and other NMS OSS elements elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client As installed From StarQuality to Oracle and server Default from Oracle to StarQuality 1521 Sending requests to AlvariSTAR 16162 SNMP in order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server 2 3 1 2 Follow these guidelines Installing Oracle Server Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server version Install Oracle Server according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the d
294. stallation Table 2 1 Selecting Installation Types Continued Installation Types Operating system Solaris 10 x86 RedHat 5 Linux x86 32 System architecture Internal database Installation Sources E StarQuality ISO Oracle database server version Oracle SW and patch supplied with the StarQuality DVD External database on same machine E Oracle server installation E StarQuality Version supplied with StarQuality DVD 10201 database solx86 64 Oracle client version installed on StarQuality machine No Oracle client required Refer to Installation on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database on page 63 Installation on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 70 External database on a separate machine External database on same machine External database on a separate machine StarQuality User Manual E Oracle Server Installation E Oracle Client installation same version as server E StarQuality exe E Oracle Server Installation E StarQuality Oracle Server Oracle Client StarQuality Consult the Oracle definitions for the machine and OS used for Oracle server Consult the Oracle definitions for the machine and OS used for Oracle server 10201 client solx86 64 or 10202 client solx86 No Oracle client required Installation on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machin
295. stallation Oracle Database configuration Install Oracle Database 10g Please select Oracle installer folder Oracle 10 2 0 3 32bit setup for Vista and 10 2 0 5 patch required Installer Folder 10203 vista w2k8 x86 production db dbiDiski setup exe p8202632 10205 WINNTIdisklisetup exe Cilinstallationsjdb Browse Oracle database install directory c Oracle Set Oracle database home directory C oraclexe app oracle product 10 2 0 server Browse Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 38 Oracle Database Configuration External Oracle Option 9 Click Next The StarQuality Windows Service Registration window is displayed Figure 2 39 The service will be run with the given Windows user Enter and confirm the required password It is recommended to use the Windows password for the same user StarQuality User Manual Se amp Q Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality ES StarQuality Setup ME E StarQuality Service registration The service will run as Administrator with the given password ServiceLogin Administrator Password Confirm password Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 39 StarQuality Windows Service Registration 10 If you selected the Xe option in Step 8 increase the processes parameters using sg olus as follows a Open a command line window and enter the following in C lUsers Administrator g
296. starquality lib No value is set for Oracle TNS Completed S Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 58 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete 7 Click Next The StarQuality Service Registration window is displayed Enter and confirm the required password Use the Windows password for the same user M starQuality Setup Bisi E StarQuality Service registration The service will run as Administrator with the given password ServiceLogin Administrator Password Confirm password Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 59 StarQuality Windows Service Registration 8 Click Next The Oracle Connection page is displayed StarQuality User Manual 8 E 50 starquality Setup E Oracle home TNS Host and port Service name SID System password Confirm password Mulls ft Install System Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Oracle connection Pre installation Tasks BiB gs Please fill in the Oracle connection parameters c Oracle product 10 2 0 db_1 e goo e Cancel Figure 2 60 Oracle Connection Parameters H Enter missing parameters and verify that the correct values are filled out in the following fields Table 2 8 Oracle Connection Parameters Substrate TNS name to be used for the database connection Parameter Description Comments Oracle Home The path to the Oracle Client Verify that automatic value is Home v
297. start and stop StarQuality WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT WARNING HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE QUESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Y WARNING IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE THAT II WARNING IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE StarQuality User Manual Se G Za 102 2 9 2 6 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality WARNING APPLICATION INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc6 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc5 d S99starquality Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User To create the tablespaces the installer prompts for the following E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration and data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table M Name and password for its Oracle user INFO Checking Oracle schema INFO Getting the default tablespace directory QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ CONF QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace file D ORACLE ORADATA DB150 SQ CONF dbf QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace size 30
298. t Figure 2 40 sqlplus as sysdba Alter system set processes 150 scope spfile Shutdown immediate Startup StarQuality User Manual Se amp amp 43 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality Windows system32 cmd exe sqlplus as sysdba C Users Administrator gt sqlplus as sysdha SQL Plus Release 16 2 6 1 Production on Sun Aug 7 16 26 66 2611 Copyright lt c gt 1982 2065 Oracle All rights reserved Connected to Oracle Database 18g Express Edition Release 1 2 1 Production SOL Alter system set processes 15 scope spfile System altered SQL gt shutdown immediate Database closed Database dismounted ORACLE instance shut down SQL gt startup ORACLE instance started Total System Global Area 805306368 Fixed Size 1289996 Variable Size 269715444 Database Buffers 591396864 Redo Buffers 2964664 Database mounted Figure 2 40 sqlplus Commands b Go back to the StarQuality installation application and click Next The StarQuality Windows Service Registration window is displayed Figure 2 39 The service will be run with the given Windows user Fill in and confirm the required password Use the Windows password for the same user 11 Click Next The Oracle Connection page is displayed Figure 2 41 starquality Setup Fre Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle connection parameters Oracle home c Oracle product 10 2 0 db_1 TNS ES Host
299. t The Oracle user parameters are displayed You can change and confirm the password StarQuality Setup Ale x Oracle connection Please Fill in the Oracle user parameters User name 5Q User password oe Confirm password ee Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 62 Oracle Connection User Parameters 13 Click Next The Setup wizard is displayed prompting that the installation is complete StarQuality User Manual amp oa ed Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Bile ks 8 StarQuality Setup Completing the StarQuality Setup Wizard StarQuality has been installed on your computer Click Finish to close this wizard i Gancel Figure 2 63 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation 14 Click Finish to close the wizard 15 Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation 16 Load a licence and run StarQuality Refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 105 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 105 StarQuality User Manual amp O 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 1 1 2 5 1 2 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installation on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database Installation on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer t
300. t r FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 SU 00 10 7 22 0F view gie a Sag FDD SNMP 10 0 16 21 SU 00 10 7 22 17 m DER SUs B2 Gre view FDD SNMP 10 0 16 21 SU 00 10 7 22 31 ge ST Figure 9 28 Device and Measurement Summary 9 5 4 Server Configuration Server configuration is available for the admin users only You can add new servers or delete and modify existing servers gt To access the Server Configuration I From the main menu select Settings 2 From the Settings panel select Servers gt Server Configuration A list of all configured servers is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp D 259 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Server Configuration Browser Servers ai H 01 Licences 2 p E 02 Device and measurement summary Server configuration 03 Server groups 15 items found 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status add new ID Name Status Type d s Host Login Pwd Directory Param1 Param2 06 Server events pr 07 Collector load edit 1 Segel Running MANAGER localhost Administrator opt starquality 60 30000 edit 2 SQLLDR Running SQLLDR localhost Administrator opt starquality 3 Threshold opt edit 3 rer Running THRESH localhost Administrator fopt starquality 6 Job edit 4 OER Running JOB localhost Administrator fopt starquality o Report er edit 5 TER Running REPORT localhost Administrator fopt starquality 6 Data i Go edit 6 EE Running COMP local
301. t counting server The number of servers cannot be extended or limited Measurement servers arbitrary number of these can exist and each must belong to a measurement server group There are three types of measurement servers matching the types given for the measurement server groups Active and discoverable the measurements are actively made by the StarQuality application through the available API The measurements supported by discoverable equipment can be discovered or queried through a suitable management protocol e g the list of interfaces on network equipment or the list of disk partitions on a UNIX server These are discovered and automatically monitored by the StarQuality e g it automatically deletes them if the measurement has ended or the measurement name has changed Even though the StarQuality automatically searches the measurements in such a case they can also be manually recorded If such a measurement is created subsequent automatic discovery will not occur Accordingly if the measured object is deleted from the active equipment it will not disappear from the StarQuality This type of measurement will again be monitored automatically only if a new manual discovery is performed on the equipment through the web interface and it is saved afterwards For certain StarQuality User Manual Se E E 255 9 5 2 9 5 2 1 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Licence Configuration discoverable servers there are measurement types
302. t the First Hierarchy Level as follows For View 1 Measurements View 2 Equipment View 3 Measurements 8 Set the number of result entries per window 9 Click OK The new view is added to the list of views 10 In the Report View Configuration window see Figure 8 3 locate your newly added view name and click on the tables link next to it The configuration page is displayed Reports 4 ojx Report view configuration Hierarchy level Sites T Table new table 5 Back dee not Properties selected selected Site description Site name Q gt G v oK Cancel Weekly Monthly Weekly Monthly add new Order Variable Name Subname Field H precision Annual Annual A name with aggregation aggregation link postfix Column Over Below Description Figure 8 5 Configuration Page 11 For views 1 and 3 only In the Hierarchy level select Additional Measurements 12 For view 2 for view 2 Choose properties Equipment name for SU name Site name for BSID and equipment IP address for BTS identifier 13 For view 3 only Move the Measurement Name property to the Properties not selected column For BTS identification choose Equipment name and or equipment IP address 14 Click add new to add variables to the report view Add as many variables as necessary The following window is displayed per each variable StarQuality User Manual Se amp SES D Chapter 8 Reports Reports a Site and equi Templates
303. tarQuality config files INFO Untar StarQuality INFO Copy the define wimax brand sql to the sql directory StarQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts for the following Operating system user name to be created Operating system group to be created Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality Profile file to be used M Type of StarQuality installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory then it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER StarQuality User Manual Se amp se 101 2 9 2 5 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N IN QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr sbin apachectl QUESTION Where i
304. terval hours seconds etc Alarm Display Options The way the alarms are displayed can be changed using the second group of controls Main View Options The following view options are available in this group Table 7 3 Alarms View Options Icon Tooltip Description Table view The alarms are displayed in a list table This is the default view Ey Refer to Overview on page 195 and Figure 7 2 StarQuality User Manual Se 197 Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Alarm Display Options Table 7 3 Alarms View Options Continued Icon Tooltip Description Object view The current site hierarchy is displayed with icons instead of the 222 table of alarms The color of icon indicates the most severe alarm existing for this item See detailed description of this view below Object View Options on page 198 Chart view The number of active alarms are displayed in a graphical form see Chart View on page 200 7 2 2 2 Object View Options By selecting the Object view icon the current site virtual site hierarchy is displayed with icons instead of the table of alarms Only those sites for which there is an active alarm are visible The icons are colored by the color code of the most severe alarm of the contained equipment for example if under a site there is an equipment with am active Critical alarm the color of the site s icon is
305. tes Not applicable Editing equipment templates Oo Threshold templates Editing threshold templates Refer to Creating and Editing Threshold Templates on page 176 M Threshold template export import Refer to Importing and Exporting Threshold Templates on page 183 M Chart templates Not applicable Editing chart templates M Exclusion window template Defining time frames in which thresholds can be activated deactivated E Time zones setting the time zone according to place of use StarQuality User Manual eo E D 253 Chapter 9 General Setting Options Templates admin only 01 MIB upload 02 Measurement type definition 03 Equipment templates 04 Threshold templates 05 Threshold template export 06 Threshold template import 07 Chart templates 08 Exdusion window templates 09 Time zones StarQuality User Manual Threshold template configuration 4 wg 3 within the add new Name Threshold name equipment Level Type Expression edit del EthernetOAM RTT gt x msec Gg No e Ge AE gr oe BS or edit del now Extreme BS or AU Not seen att No Warning Variable 1 WiMAX Extreme Seen Table 0 1xin 1 sample seen BS or e 7 edit del now FDD ES or AU Not seen Re SIE Wo Warning AU Variable 1 WIMAX FDD Seen Table 0 1xin 1 sample seen BS or edit del now EDD TETP Bs or AU Not seen un cert W
306. tes equipments Searching Measurements on measurements and charts on the basis page 167 of sites equipment names Root root directory navigation startpoint Public and private menu items for viewing the alarms under the chosen menu item if defined Items in the Browser View menu group Selecting the display mode for the alarms Measurements Display Options on page 158 measurements appears only when selecting a measurement E from time date to time date E day week month year E real time view auto refresh view Split View Displaying two lists of elements in the Displaying Elements Side by Side main area and compare elements on page 159 Time Span Selecting the time range to display Viewing Measurements by Time Span on page 163 Chart Settings Displaying the measurement values Chart Settings on page 165 Elements menu group Contains a list of the sites equipments and measurement types The root of the hierarchy is determined by the originally selected menu item E Element name e g lt FDD Network gt If the list contains too many elements they are grouped by the system using links pointing to the sub lists E Measurement Types for filtering the measurements by their types Element Browsing Options on page 160 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Reports 3 3 3 Reports The following items are d
307. tes are available Setup and configuration Network connection between StarQuality and UNIX machines Information IP address of UNIX machine UNIX user name and password The prompt for the user used for discovery must have the following pattern end with a space or have a gt or character followed by a space 2 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 3 Click the Server Health icon to enter its site 4 From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipment from Template StarQuality User Manual Se E SE Chapter 4 Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 5 Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup Default Unix Linux 6 Click OK A basic setup template page is displayed Template name Default Unix Linux Equipment name Equipment description IP address User Password Timeout sec Retries Default measurement 15 min zl interval EE Choose an icon E icon equip png v Timeout sec Configured Add immediately to job queue OK Cancel Figure 4 13 Default Unix Linux Template 7 Fill in the required information for parameter information and description refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 135 Name and description free text IP address lt ip address gt User lt root gt Password lt root password gt Leave a
308. the BTSs under it and creating a utility network Following are available site types BW VWiMAX equipment WiMAX FDD SNMP FDD versions 3 5 3 6 SNMP data collection Up to 10 SUs per BTS can be measured WiMAX FDD TFTP FDD version 3 7 and later TFTP data collection WiMAX TDD TDD versions 4 5 and later TFTP data collection AMotion versions 2 5M 3 0 3 0M 3 5 BreezeACCESS VL version 6 0 Up to 10 SUs per BTS can be measured Extreme version 1 8 M Server Health AlvariSTAR Version 4 0 and later Oracle UNIX The measurements can be viewed not less than 30 minutes following the initial collection for each device For more information on configuration refer to Chapter 9 General Setting Options on page 230 me gt To create a WiMAX network site under ROOT I From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 From the Creation drop down menu select Create New Site Fill in the site name free text and its description optional 3 Select a corresponding icon StarQuality User Manual amp Chapter 4 Network Discovery Overview 4 Select a Server Group see Figure 4 1 For FDD 3 5 3 6 network WiMAX FDD For FDD 3 7 network WiMAX FDD TFTP For TDD network WiMAX TDD For 4Motion ver 2 5 network WiMAX 4Motion For Extreme network WiMAX Extreme For VL network WiMAX VL Site and equipment confi 4 Ch ROOT Op
309. thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeMAX BreezeLITE 4Motion and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners WiMAX Forum is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum WiMAX the WiMAX Forum logo WiMAX Forum Certified and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive W
310. tification ixcccas sxasscatsionstssaenacatncegrasaresssatneednmenessnarceaueteccusuneees 246 Missing Collection Intervals auusssoseessmsaneeemeim damene dnme dd 246 Collection Filling Prorressuusssearsssaeresssgnas osean ueGbseen 247 Collection Filling FORCE 247 Preferences setae seats crc a cece eee he meee eee 249 E mail Address Ep RENE geed 251 Example of Separate Threshold Violation Notification NN 252 Example of Bulk Threshold Violation Notification ANEREN 253 Setting Templates Vy WOW usann cuanateaunandietmbananektatadinanueuedehensasaansaeauandeeliee 254 Licence Configuration Screen uuansusnuuakmans hevner hj hevede 257 Device and Measurement Summary ENEE EEN 259 Server Configuration Ree e 260 Editing Server ECKE 262 Server Configuration Adding New ssssssssssssssusrnnnnnnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn bet 263 SEE STAS ver tcrcccs Serectcecs seat ce rete eaines ogres enteceaewe seas dneenttctens de tenceeeeaeemoeeedeines 264 Server Events e e 265 Collector Load EEN 266 Collector Load RE ENT 266 Missing Measurements at a Given Time nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 267 Chapter 1 Introduction In this chapter E System Overview on page 2 M System Data Structure on page 4 M User levels and Their Settings on page 5 Chapter 1 Introduction System Overview Fl System Overview 1 1 1 General StarQuality is a carrier class performance and traffic monitoring syst
311. tion shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein Any changes or modifications of equipment including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for It could also void the user s authority to operate the equipment StarQuality User Manual ea SE About this Manual About this Manual The StarQuality User Manual comprises the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of the StarQuality system and its functionality Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation describes how to install and uninstall the StarQuality application and use commands to start and stop it Chapter 3 Getting Started describes the structure of the interface windows logging in general display options searching the menu system operations and navigation and editing of objects Chapter 4 Network Discovery describes the creation of a WiMAX network and all the BTSs under it In addition it describes the creation of a utility network Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements describes browsing options display options viewing measurement data searching measurements and saving items as a submenu Chapter 6 Settin
312. tions the Details view and the log file To display the Details view click Show Details in the installation wizard The log file is located in the Temp directory of the user by default C Documents and Settings lt USER gt Local Settings Temp 2 3 2 2 Procedure I Ensure that the pre installation tasks are complete as required in Section 2 3 1 2 Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive and copy the Installation folder directly onto one of the disk drives for example CH NOTE Do not place the installation files into a folder with a long path This is an Oracle installer limitation 3 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed StarQuality User Manual Se amp amp Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality File x Welcome to the StarQuality Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of StarQuality It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue cael Figure 2 32 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window 4 Click Next The wizard displays the license agreement Read the agreement carefully B StarQuality Setup Bisi E License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing StarQuality Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement This pr
313. tomatic refresh time of the charts in Alarms an Measurements E Last minutes 15 sec E Last hours 1 min E Daily 5 min Weekly 30 min M Monthly 2 hour E Annual 1 day Time zone Time zone of the server Default chart display for equipments Default chart display for virtual equipments Select if to expand or collapse the charts in Measurements StarQuality remembers the choice for every chart you change locally in the Measurements window Here you can set the default or reset your local choices E Show expand chart E Do not show collapse chart recommended E Reset objects delete local settings and reset to default Flash charts Select Yes to use the Flash based charts by default Indicator Not applicable Y prefix Not applicable StarQuality User Manual Chapter 9 General Setting Options Setting E mail Addresses Admin only Table 9 4 User Preferences Continued Item Description Maximum number of Flash chart Set the number of the elements on each chart to save memory elements and CPU usage The visible charts are always drawn regardless of this value i e if the value is set to 0 only the visible charts are drawn If the value is not set the application takes the value set on the server side and if that is not set either then its value is 40 Flash chart value indicators If this option is set and the chart has four or less elements then
314. ttings Continued Settings reports admin only Item Description See also Thresholds Setting alarm threshold Setting Alarm Thresholds on parameters admin only page 174 Reports Setting and viewing system Reports on page 204 Customization Editing of public objects refers to the administrator users while editing of private objects refers to the rest of the users Customization on page 248 Templates Editing various system Creating and Editing templates admin only Threshold Templates on page 176 Servers Managing and configuring Server Configuration and servers admin only Management Admin only on page 255 User Managing user settings Managing Licences on page 257 StarQuality User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy 3 4 Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy In Alarms Measurements and Reports pages and also under the Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration submenu there are three elements at the top of the page These fields are always visible even if the page is scrolled M The Operations pull down menu located at the top right contains different options depending on the current object and menu item see Figure 3 5 Fast navigation between the menu items while keeping the actual location within the hierarchy for example immediate opening of the measurement charts
315. ty Add firewall port StarQuality Chart Server TCP 4444 Checking Oracle parameters Output folder C starquality opt starquality lib No value is set For Oracle TNS Completed a Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 14 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete 7 Click Next The installer prompts for the Oracle installation and patch located on the StarQuality DVD Figure 2 15 8 Enter the path to the Oracle installer folder You can click Browse to navigate to the folder M StarQuality Setup Mila x Oracle Database install Please select Oracle installer folder Oracle 10 2 0 1 32bit setup for XP and 10 2 0 4 patch required Installer Folder 10201 database win32 database setup exe p6810189 10204 Win32Idiskiisetup exe Oracle installer Folder C Documents and Settings AdministratoriDeskt Browse Nullsoft Install System v2 42 Back Cancel Figure 2 15 Oracle Database Install 9 Click Next The StarQuality Installation window is displayed Figure 2 16 StarQuality User Manual Se 8 amp 23 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 10 Click Browse to change the default Oracle home directory NOTE e e The Oracle home directory must be on the same disk drive as the StarQuality Cygwin root directory H see Figure 2 3 ES StarQuality Setup Bee i StarQuality installation Oracle Database install Pl
316. u select Save As Submenu 3 Specify if this menu item should appear in Measurement or Alarms or both menus 4 Click OK the item appears in the Measurements Alarms menu StarQuality User Manual Se amp Bes 170 Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements Setting Trendlines to Graphs 5 8 Setting Trendlines to Graphs When working in Flash mode StarQuality enables defining trendlines for displayed measurements You can also define thresholds using the trendline values ve To set trendlines I When viewing a result table in Flash mode right click on the table itself and select Set trendline The Set Trendline page is displayed The parameters in this page may vary depending on the equipment type and measurements ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 233 gt Common measurements Operation z 10 10 144 233 ASN GW MS Registration Export to XLS 4 Set trendline Authentication OK Rejections Created Service Flows Cancel Qty Failed Initial NE Max Registered MSs Min Registered MSs Linear Polynomial x 2 Registered MSs Qty Succeed Initial NE Limit indicator Limit sum xl Average and one deviation Average and two deviation Average and three deviation Figure 5 15 Setting Trendlines Window 2 For every entry select one of the following trendline types from the drop down list Linear Polynomial x42 to x46 Difference The difference between the current value and the previous v
317. uality The required steps are 1 Configure network ports Section 2 7 1 1 2 Install the Oracle Section 2 7 1 2 3 Install StarQuality Section 2 7 2 4 Run StarQuality Section 2 10 3 Pre installation Tasks Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements StarQuality User Manual Se amp E Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 11 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed equipment 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE App server managed equipment and 162 SNMP Outbound towards other NMS OSS elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed equipment 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client server As installed From StarQuality to Oracle Default and from Oracle to 1521 StarQuality Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in 16162 SNMP order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server 2 7 1 2 Installing Oracle Follow these guidelines HM Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server Client versions M install Oracle Server on a standalone Oracle machine according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes M Install Oracle client
318. ult and from Oracle to 1521 StarQuality Sending requests to AlvariSTAR in 16162 SNMP order to reach KPI SMTP server 25 SMTP Outbound towards SMTP server StarQuality User Manual Se amp 26 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality 2 9 1 2 Installing Oracle Follow these guidelines Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server Client versions Install Oracle Server on a standalone Oracle machine according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes Install Oracle client using the Administrator type installation Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation When completing the Oracle client installation use the Oracle Net Configuration Assistant to create a connection to the Database server and test it During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality machine should be available To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sq p us utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and the system password is oracle use a console logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme Enter exit or quit to complete the pro
319. unsuccessful measurements Managing deactivated equipments Merging inactive sectors Completing gap periods in 4Motion NOTE Some of the items in the browser are not applicable therefore are not described StarQuality User Manual E 233 Path Chapter 9 General Setting Options Work Area Operations Browser Items edit Big Setups edit BreezeMAX TOO edit edit egen edit A edit H Ges edit maa edit BESS Rado Work Area Figure 9 1 Site and Equipment Configuration in the Settings Window 9 2 2 Work Area Operations This section describes operations that are available via the options in the main working area 9 2 2 1 Navigation and General Operations Follow these guidelines Table 9 1 General Operations in Site and Equipment Configuration To Do this Comments Navigate down the hierarchy drill down Click the site equipment icons Navigate up the hierarchy Do one of the following E Click OK or Cancel at the bottom of any configuration screen The system goes one level up E Click Back Sec E Click one of the active links in the path showing the actual location within the hierarchy The Back button always appears first in the list of sites equipments in any navigation screen The path starts at the top left hand side of the screen and remains visible even if the page is scrolled Edit a site equipment Click edit A
320. up to 10 SUs as described in Section 4 2 3 4 2 2 Setting Automatic Discovery of Equipment from AlvariSTAR StarQuality can be set to automatically access the AlvariSTAR server and perform discovery of WiMAX equipment discovered in AlvariSTAR If an equipment is found in both AlvariSTAR and in StarQuality StarQuality synchronizes the WiMAX equipment details name SNMP parameters etc according to the data in AlvariSTAR StarQuality User Manual Se amp Ges ec Chapter 4 Network Discovery Setting Automatic Discovery of Equipment from AlvariSTAR If a WiMAX equipment is found in AlvariSTAR only StarQuality discovers it and starts collecting from it A daily log file of the discovery cycles is placed under 0pttarquality logs and named according to the following convention AS25Q lt yyyymmdd gt log For example AS25Q 20110605 0g e To configure Auto discovery I Verify that the following is available The AlvariSTAR server is active The AlvariSTAR server includes a license containing the required license feature service activation NBI Port 10161 is enabled between the AlvariSTAR and StarQuality machines 2 From Settings select Servers gt Server Configuration The Server Configuration window is displayed Server configuration Server group Other Alvaristar gt StarQuality zl Host Type Login Pwd Directory AlvariStar SOAP URL Th
321. using the Administrator type installation M Set up the Oracle data files and redo logs according to the expected database size and system load For details on these procedures check the relevant Oracle Database documentation M When completing the Oracle client installation use the Oracle Net Configuration Assistant to create a connection to the Database server and test it M During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality machine should be available M To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sq p us utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and system password is oracle switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme Enter exit or quit to complete the procedure StarQuality User Manual Se amp De 2 7 2 2 7 2 1 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality M The following Oracle database information should be available when installing the StarQuality Oracle Database server IP Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM use Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Solaris 10 x86 operating system using the command line installer All operations should be done while logged in as root user To install StarQuality Solaris
322. vice Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 4 3 2 SU KPIs Table 11 5 BreezeACCESS VL SU Performance KPIs KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Concatenated Frames Receive frames per second Concatenated Frames Single HVCFS The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames There Concatenated Frames Double VCFD Se ER are also separate counts for concatenated frames that Concatenated Frames More HVCFM include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More Concatenated Frames Total VCFT Concatenated Frames Transmit frames per second The total number of concatenated frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More StarQuality User Manual Q Ee Q Chapter 11 Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 5 BreezeACCESS VL SU Performance KPIs Continued KPI Measurement Name for Reports Code for Description Threshold and API Errors Received frames per second Errors Receive CRC HVERC E Phy The number of Physical errors unidentified signals Errors Receive Decrypt VERD yp E CRC The number of frames received from the Errors Receive Duplicate frames
323. vidual columns are E Editing links add new adding a new licence file del deleting a licence entry Name Name of the licence End date Expiration date of the given licence If it is unlimited then use never Quantity Quantity of licences in the system Can be unlimited Needed Quantity required to operate the system StarQuality User Manual Se amp ZE Chapter 9 General Setting Options Device and Measurement Summary E Error type In those rows where the licence is invalid an error message is shown and the row is displayed in red Possible error messages Wrong checksum invalid line since someone directly modified the licence entry Expired licence was valid for a limited period only which has expired No licence found the given licence entry is required but not found Low licence quantity the quantity of the given licence is not enough for the system A licence can be added by providing a licence file During this process the application keeps the already existing licence entries or modifies them if they exist in the file ke To add a new licence 1 Place the licence file on the computer from which you activated the client 2 From Settings select Servers the Servers tab is displayed Select Licences The Licences Configuration window is displayed 3 4 Click add new and browse for the file containing the license 5 Click OK A list detailing the licenses is displayed
324. view for reference StarQuality Setup Els Installing Please wait while StarQuality is being installed Execute setup exe q R C starquality Extract vim 7 1 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin minlinstall from releaselw32api Extract w32api 3 11 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_From release which Extract which 2 19 1 tar bz2 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_From release zlib Extract zlib 1 2 3 2 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality install Cygwin Install Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min GAN Execute setup exe q R C starquality Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Back Figure 2 35 StarQuality Installing The last page indicates that the basic installation is complete StarQuality User Manual Se amp Eo 40 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality lity Setup IIe StarQuality basic installation complete Press Next to continue with the remaining installation steps Completed Apache stopped Add firewall port StarQuality WEB TCP 80 Wed Nov 5 17 24 27 2008 alert httpd Could not determine the server s fully qual Apache is running Configuring StarQuality Add firewall port StarQuality Chart Server TCP 4444 Checking Oracle parameters
325. wing order equipment name equipment description optional IP address and Site name optional Allowed delimiters semicolon or tab Save it as a txt type file b In the StarQuality application click Browse to select this file c Click OK The system returns the imported equipment into an editable table as shown below add new Equipment name Site name Equipment description IP address WiMAX del FDD 08 EDD TETP Bs 8 192 168 100 135 Se FDD_12 Th lips I ETETE WIMAX del pp 12 EDD TETE Bs 12 192 168 70 31 AST Figure 4 3 Adding Equipment from an Input File d Make any adjustments by editing the table You can add new entries delete existing entries or modify their content 11 Click OK the system searches and discovers each existing and online BTS For each discovered BTS a Success message appears For each unsuccessful discovery an error massage is displayed and the system continues to the next device 12 When the discovery is complete click Back to return to the network site 13 Verify that all the equipments are not colored red which means that their data is being collected 14 Verify that for each BTS a matching site has been created named as the BTS with the postfix SUs i e lt btsname SUs gt 15 In case of BTS SNMP collection FDD 3 5 3 6 or BreezeACCESS VL this SU site is colored red which means that no SU under it is being collected yet In this case activate Data Collection for
326. wn the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting Connection Details of External Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user used during the Oracle installation After providing it it tries to determine the value of the ORACLE HOME environment variable using that user and asks for confirmation QUESTION The OS user of Oracle oracle INFO Found Oracle home home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 StarQuality User Manual Se amp Za Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality QUESTION ORACLE HOME environment variable home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 INFO Checking the Oracle home home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 INFO Oracle home home oracle oracle product 10 2 0 client 2 seems to be OK INFO Checking Oracle version INFO Found Oracle version 10 INFO Detected 32 bit Oracle QUESTION StarQuality OS user name starq QUESTION StarQuality OS user group starq QUESTION StarQuality OS user password QUESTION StarQuality installation directory below the opt directory starquality INFO Creating group starq INFO Creating user starq with shell usr local bin bash INFO Setting the user password INFO Select user starq and group starq with directory opt starquality INFO Checking the environment of starq QUESTION What is the profile file of the u
327. wser On demand report pl METTET Ee 15 16 17 18 19 2 2 E 5 a 2 Ms 2 7 2 EI EE bay Week Month Vear E Gl chart settings Figure 8 9 On demand Reports Search 3 Specify the Search parent attribute No to search by equipment attribute Yes to search by parent attribute Field Leave Name Search enter strings to be searched All rules are applied as in Searching Measurements on page 167 Without enter strings to exclude from the search Type Equipments choose a specific equipment type Select the number of requested results in the report INFORMATION The message Not all matching rows returned may appear at the bottom of the table if there are v more results than selected counts 4 Click OK at the top right of the window The list of results is displayed Figure 8 10 5 To narrow or improve the filtering edit the title line and click OK Repeat until the requested results are returned StarQuality User Manual Se amp SS D Chapter 8 Reports Working with On Demand Reports gt Browser On demand report D ISL vote gt Search gt Mensurement types Brev ext Eet a o eette gt Search gt Mesarenent r Next TC aleal AMALIA 1A AS ee GE SSES g Bee Title line ss munn mn FE EE type Za Parent type Er Sa BELT D Eadonent EE EEN ste 85 1 215 200 D ament E Ste Seti Day Week Month Year K Equipment SU 00 10
328. x86 INFO Checking perl 32 64bit INFO Checking perl PerlIO INFO Perl was built with PerlIO INFO Checking perl threading INFO Perl threading enabled INFO Checking required packages INFO Package bash found INFO Package openssh found INFO Package grep found INFO Package tar found INFO Package gzip found INFO Package httpd found INFO Package sed found INFO Done INFO Checking required packages for the schematic map feature StarQuality User Manual Se amp SES s9 2 8 2 2 2 8 2 3 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Package libjpeg 32 bit found INFO Package freetype 32 bit found INFO Package libXpm 32 bit found INFO Package libXau 32 bit found INFO Package libXdmcp 32 bit found INFO Package libX11 32 bit found INFO Done INFO Checking the SELinux state INFO SELinux is disabled OK INFO Keep in mind that the SELinux must not be activated when StarQuality is running INFO Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality INFO Done INFO Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses License Information When t
329. y INFO Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc5 d S99starquality Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User To create the tablespaces the installer prompts for the following and E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration and data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table M Name and password for its Oracle user INFO Checking Oracle schema INFO Getting the default tablespace directory QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ CONF QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace file D ORACLE ORADATA DB150 SQ CONF dbf QUESTION StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ CONF this could take several minutes QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ DATA QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace file D ORACLE ORADATA DB150 SQ DATA 01 dbf QUESTION StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M INFO Creating the tablespace SQ DATA this could take several minutes StarQuality User Manual Se amp E 94 Chapter 2 StarQuality Installation Installing StarQuality QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user name SQ QUESTION StarQuality Oracle user password INFO Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes INFO Oracle user SQ created 2 8 2 8 Completing the Installation I The i
330. y installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory then it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality instance it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr apache bin apachect1 QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr apache bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run apache httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc apache httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc apache httpd conf 20090512 122852 from etc apache httpd conf INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc apache httpd conf INFO Starting Apache INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING YOU SHOULD ON

StarQuality User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents